JP6883638B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to so-called ball-type gaming machines (hereinafter, also referred to as "pachinko gaming machines" or "pachinko machines") and rotating cylinder-type gaming machines (generally also referred to as "pachislot machines" and "slot machines"). It is about a game machine.

In a general pachinko gaming machine, whether or not a game ball (game medium) is launched into a game area and a big hit that is advantageous to the player is generated when the ball enters a starting port provided in the game area. Make a lottery. Then, a variable display of a special symbol is performed based on the lottery result regarding the jackpot, and a variable display using a decorative symbol is also performed on a liquid crystal display device or the like, and whether the jackpot is won in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize. Whether or not is indicated.

In recent years, not only is the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won, but the gaming state is controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the jackpot game. As a result, the number of gaming machines that can be expected for the next big hit is increasing. In such an advantageous gaming state, the time saving state is generally controlled in accordance with the time saving state, and most of the symbol fluctuation time in the time saving state is shorter than that in the normal gaming state, so that the early stage in the advantageous gaming state is achieved. The game can be progressed (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075743

However, with such a gaming machine, while it can be expected to win the next big hit early, the advantageous gaming state may easily end without being able to win the next big hit, and the interest of the player is great. There was a risk of deterioration.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the expectation for a big hit in an advantageous gaming state.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention acquires start information by passing a game ball to a predetermined area provided in the game area, and draws a lottery regarding a big hit when the start condition of the acquired start information is satisfied. Acquired according to the means, the special figure effect means for performing the variation effect on the display device according to the variation display of the special symbol indicating the winning of the big hit based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the predetermined area. The holding storage means for holding the start information, the start storage display means capable of displaying the start information held in the hold storage means on the display device as the start storage display, and the acquired start information as the start condition. A pre-judgment means for performing a pre-judgment before the establishment of the above, and a specific effect means for executing a specific effect that holds expectations for a big hit in a variable effect in which the start condition of the acquired start information is satisfied and executed. In the variation effect performed based on the start information acquired before the start information in which the specific effect is executed in the variation effect performed by the establishment of the start condition, the specific effect is performed later. The precursor effect means for executing the precursor effect suggesting that the variation effect is executed, and the precursor effect executed by the precursor effect means is executed by the specific effect in the variation effect to be performed later. It is an effect suggesting that the specific effect is to be performed, and when the mode of the precursor effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed becomes a specific mode, the specific effect may be executed in the variable effect to be performed later. The player can recognize which of the start information that is configured to be notified and is held in the hold storage means, which may execute the specific effect. In addition, the display mode of the start memory display by the start memory display means can be displayed in a change suggestion mode different from the normal display mode, and the pre-determination performed by the pre-determination means before the establishment of the start condition By making the process common to the lottery performed when the start condition of the start information is satisfied by the lottery means, it is determined in advance by the advance determination means that the specific effect is the start information to be executed. allows determination prior to the starting condition of the start information is established by the determination, when the embodiment of the aura effect by executing the aura effect is did not become the specific embodiments, executing the aura effect again, The specific effect is executed by setting the mode of the precursor effect to be executed again to the specific mode. The specific effect performed after the mode of the precursor effect becomes the specific aspect is executed in a form in which the specific aspect of the precursor effect is inherited, and the start memory. Based on the fact that the start condition of the start information displayed as the start memory display by the display means is satisfied, the start memory display displayed of the start information for which the start condition is satisfied is terminated, and a new start condition is displayed. The start information for which the start condition is satisfied is displayed on the display device as the variable display, and the start condition of the start information for which the display mode of the start memory display is displayed in the change suggestion mode is satisfied. In the variation effect started by the above, the change suggestion mode in which the variation display displayed when the specific effect is executed is displayed as the start memory display before the start condition is satisfied is different from the change suggestion mode. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed in a mode.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the expectation for a big hit in an advantageous gaming state.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at later. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is sectional drawing of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at afterwards. It is sectional drawing which cut at the part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows with the front cover of a foul cover unit removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of the ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit removed from the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front, and (D). Is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which shows by cutting the door frame substantially in the center in the vertical direction. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at afterwards. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover in an enlarged manner. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a door frame and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a door frame and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at later. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 in the vertical direction. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the security structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear with the game board housed in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the rear by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is sectional drawing which cut at the substantially center of the game board in the vertical direction, and viewed from the upper side. It is a cross-sectional view seen from the right side by cutting the game board at the center in the left-right direction. It is a perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the attacker unit. It is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the start port unit of the front unit from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the start port unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the start port unit. (A) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the front side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the front side unit. It is a front view of the center accessory of the front unit. It is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the center accessory afterwards. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main member and looked at afterwards. It is a perspective view which looked at the distribution member of a center accessory from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the distribution member of a center accessory from the rear. It is a front sectional view which shows the left route in a center accessory together with a part of a warp passage. It is a perspective view which shows the lower warp passage member and a stage member in a center accessory. (A) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a perspective view of the second starting port unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second starting port unit of the center accessory as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the second starting port unit of the center accessory as seen from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the second start port unit of a center accessory. (A) is a front sectional view showing a right route in a center accessory, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). (A) is an enlarged front sectional view showing a main part of the right route when the second starting port of the center accessory is in the open state, and (b) is cut at the portion of the second starting port in (a). It is a side sectional view. It is the front sectional view which shows the main part of the right route when the 2nd prize opening of a center accessory is open. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at afterwards. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and (B) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st big hit game start processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st jackpot game processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd big hit game start processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd jackpot game processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is an example of a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for a jackpot, and (B) is an example of a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for a type of jackpot. (A) is an example of a fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit, and (B) is an example of a fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of reach loss. This is an example of a lottery effect distribution table for distributing reach effects (lottery effects) based on a variation pattern. It is a figure for demonstrating the degree of expectation for each lottery production. It is a figure for demonstrating the control example which can adjust the possibility of V winning. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the payout appearance execution process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prize ball processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the 1st start opening and the 1st grand prize opening. It is a figure explaining the display of a symbol and the like in a main liquid crystal display device. It is a figure explaining the display example of the hold display. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the variation display example of the decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the variation display example of the decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the effect display example about the continuous-attack continuous effect. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the effect display example about the continuous-attack continuous effect. It is a figure (the 3) explaining the effect display example about the continuous-attack continuous effect. It is a figure (the 4) explaining the effect display example about the continuous-attack continuous effect. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the production display example about the decisive battle continuous production of the 1st example. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the production display example which concerns on the decisive battle continuous production of the 1st example. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the production display example about the decisive battle continuous production of the 2nd example. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the production display example about the decisive battle continuous production of the 2nd example. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the effect display example about the hold promotion effect. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the effect display example about the hold promotion effect. It is a figure which exemplifies the relationship between the hold display color and the degree of expectation. It is a figure explaining the effect display example about the period freeze effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, the main body frame, and the game board constituting the pachinko machine. , It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is hit, and a game on the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4. It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the person side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and each in the left-right direction. The width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and is opened by moving the right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, the game area 1100 in which the game ball is hit is facing through the game window 101 having a substantially circular shape, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, obstacle nails (not shown), various winning openings, accessories, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a back cover 900 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and the left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 are used to connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engaging notch portion 15 is provided which penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. A projecting portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 108). A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending in the vertical direction, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 while being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be formed, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. A decorative cover 23 and a decorative cover 23 are provided. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14 (A)). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the lock member 27 can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, so that the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion piece 20b has a shape bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. The width of the support hook hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d and the like are provided. A main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 into the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 The main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed by locking the support hook hole 20c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000, which are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 can be engaged with each other by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. It can be detached and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is attached to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b that protrudes, the elastic piece 27c that protrudes from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes a part of the support hook hole 20c bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the deepest part of the support hook hole 20c. The portion is not closed, and a space is formed in the deepest portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the deepest portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip side of the stopper portion 27a is the inlet end. A normal state in which the portion faces the stop hanging portion 20f (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f and the contact is not made). In the shaft support state, the centers of the shaft support pin 633 located at the deepest part of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are offset in the oblique direction and face each other. ing. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c. Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the support hook hole 20c formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft. The component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d, and the contact between the shaft support pin 633 and the inner surface on one side of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the tangent portion, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 supports it. The moment to rotate in the direction away from the protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is sandwiched between the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inner surface on one side of the support hook hole 20c. Hold the state. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip of the stopper 27a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengaging, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 is directed to the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, by pushing the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, FIG. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the deepest portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the front end side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, so that the lock member 27 is elastic. It is urged by the elastic force of the piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c, and at the same time, the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a. Is opposed to the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c. Therefore, the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, thereby making the main body frame 3 the outer frame 2 It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to make the nails easier to drive, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left-right direction can be widened. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is the side frame plate 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, when the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, each of them Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, for example) It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It includes a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. The glass unit 590 and the door are provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which shows.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner circumference is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both the lower left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. And a handle bracket 140 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when attaching or detaching the side speaker 130. It has become.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is such that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 cover the lower part of the game window 101. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192, etc. (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base. The door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the board 194, and the wiring cord 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of (see 28) is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the entire door frame base unit 100 is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to the speakers 130, 222, 262. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring code 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. is on the right side (axis) of the door frame base board 194 when viewed from the rear. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral relay terminal plate It is designed to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 has the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes a speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and a ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and the tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116 which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the rear. The board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) of the above, and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101, which is arranged closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111. It is provided with a security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the elastic piece 185 for mounting the security cover 180, which protrudes rearward from the door. Further, the door frame base main body 110 is recessed to the front side substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101, and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 590 can be brought into contact with the glass unit support step 110a of the game window 101. It further includes two locking member mounting portions 110b that project rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery and rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting portion 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 338 (see FIG. 18 and the like) at appropriate positions. It is formed.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g and the foul cover unit 540 in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300, which will be described later, are located. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the upper side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 on the front side thereof, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole is made from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 by a thin drill or the like, which is made of metal. It can be prevented by the crime prevention member 121, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at the position of .5 m) so that the sound can reach the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction from the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting related different sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is formed on the rear surface on the rear side in the vertical direction. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the rear step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base board cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 can be formed. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

The wiring holding member 197 is bound to a predetermined binding hole 197a paired up and down with a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the closed door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively far apart, so wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base board cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main body frame 3 is provided so that a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction while being rotatably supported on the rear surface. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring cord 196, disconnection of connector, etc.) from occurring due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts via the wiring cord 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, even if a force acts through the wiring cord 196, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of defects.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 makes a state in which a bridge is built between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring cord 196 Since a part of the wiring cord 196 is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as being caught and broken or the door frame 5 being unable to be closed, and the main control board 4100, peripheral control unit 4140, payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, etc. Wiring that connects each decorative substrate 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. as door-side electrical equipment. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of defects in the code 196 as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even if the wiring cord 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. By doing so, the force can be released, so that the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being pulled, and the wiring cord 196 is pulled to cause a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connection connector. Can be prevented. Further, since a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, it is a conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009). -No. 213675), the wiring cord 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, a binding band 198 is inserted into a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring cord 196 is held by the binding band 198. The binding band 198 holding the 196 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring cord 196 together with the binding band 198 can be prevented from falling off from the wiring holding member 197. It can be reliably prevented.

Further, even if the position where the wiring cord 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, as described above, the wiring cord is provided by the wiring holding member 197. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring cord 196 from hanging when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding the door frame 5, the strength and rigidity of the side side of the door frame 5 that is supported by the shaft are increased. The main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention against fraudulent activities can be used.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least toward the side along which the wiring cord 196 is along, the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 are used. The wiring cord 196 can be surrounded on three sides, and the wiring cord 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Therefore, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to substantially the same length as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring cord 196 is extended. With the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the predetermined position is set to the position on the axial center side of the door frame 5 with respect to the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding. When opening and closing the door frame 5, a pantograph-shaped link is formed at the axis of the member 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring cord 196 extends in the main body frame 3. The movement of the wiring holding member 197, the wiring cord 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing work can be easily performed, and the force applied to the wiring cord 196, etc. can be reduced to prevent disconnection, etc. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring cord 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded and compactly assembled, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring cord 196 can be compactly assembled, and the wiring cord 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the wiring cord 196 is held in the wiring holding member 197 along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base board cover 195 side). The protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5 side for moving (opening / closing), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force for opening / closing the door frame 5, which is described above. It is possible to surely produce the desired action and effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 is provided. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size, and having a large game board 4 and strongly attracting the attention of the player. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The 143 and the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141 are provided. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 by a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the axis of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined at an angle, the handle bracket 140 is attached so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward in the front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted at an angle.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed at the lower long side end edge of the long side end edges thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. A vertically bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction is provided at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 that substantially corresponds to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes open side outer bent projecting pieces 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open-side inwardly bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open-side inwardly bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open-side outerly bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side If an illegal tool such as a driver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U shape (FIG. FIG. (Refer to 108), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a crime prevention rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, both the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that project rearward along the shape of the ends. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security front projecting piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the security front projecting piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching it to the security cover attachment portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the security front projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer circumference of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and is also fitted. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the security rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is the front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component member 1110. As a result, even if an illegal tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

Since the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball striking guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

As a result, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower rear side of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are displayed from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the doors and an attempt is made to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (inside the game area 1100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering and cheating. It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety against the above.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for locking the stopper piece 592a of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In the glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, the shaft is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

Further, the launch cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29 (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29 (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed later.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 that is arranged behind the side lens 210. On the rear side of the side inner lens 212, the decorative substrate 214 on the right side, which is arranged from approximately the center to the upper side in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and the side inner on the lower side. The rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and the right side upper decorative substrate 214 which are arranged from substantially the center to the lower side of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and have a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the side so as to cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a lens 210 and a decorative substrate cover 220 on the lower right side that is attached to the side decorative frame 202.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged with a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, in front of the side lens 210 and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and is an abbreviation for the game window 101. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. It includes an inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to 212, and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the upper side inner lens 206.

In the right side decorative unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. The 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do so, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. It is formed in a curved shape along the outer circumference on the right side of the door. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a that are divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 210b made of the prism surface of the above. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend above the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and are formed from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed in a state of being recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

Further, the side lens 210 is provided with a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in a row in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusion lens portion 210c can widely diffuse the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker 222 in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker 222 is sent to the player side. It can be transmitted well.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted inside the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 can diffusely refract and reflect light by the wrinkled portion and a plurality of small diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. At the same time, it is possible to make the perspective look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a used have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A lens having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is a red and green LED in this example.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and is provided on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Similar to the side inner lens 212, the front side of the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed in a wrinkled shape, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses allow light to be diffusely refracted and diffusely reflected.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and arranged on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can produce a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decorative unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decorative unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emitting mode of the left side decorative unit with a photograph.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the right side is the game window 101. Along with the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrically formed with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and the large window frames 242a having a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a which are continuously arranged on the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and a large window frame 244a. It includes a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side with respect to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250. An inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and having a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. It is provided with a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258, which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side, which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. It includes a left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is a transparent transparent unit 240 that supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view and the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by a plurality of strip-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 on the upper right side of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. It is provided with an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the upper left side decorative substrate cover 258, and the lower left side decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the inner is formed. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (silver in this example). Further, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, the small windows on both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c and 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b and 244b so as to penetrate the side surface of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and the small window frames 242b and 244b are formed. The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through the 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. Light is diffusely refracted by the diffuser portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. are not clearly visible from the player side.

Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. The decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example has a form extending in the vertical direction along the left outer circumference of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is made of synthetic resin. It is formed.

In the side lower decorative frame 242, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

Further, the side upper decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in front view, which is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the side open. The decorative frame 244 on the side has two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame arranged between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with 244b and an opening frame 244c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

In the side upper decorative frame 244, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. The 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the decorative frame 244 on the side can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and visible.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side of the center on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 and the peripheral lens portion 250a are recessed to the rear side. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 250b formed on the front side and a side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radial lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 also has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer circumference of the game window 101 and concentrically centered on the center of the game window 101 in the width direction thereof. Multiple are provided. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffuser portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner band-shaped lens is arranged in the extending direction on the front side. It intersects (substantially orthogonally) with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a of the decorative member 251.

In the side inner lens 252, the diffuser portion 252a is visible from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, the light is diffusely refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffuser portion 252a, so that the light is diffused. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on the surface, and the large side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are mounted. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used on the side. The LEDs 254b, arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. As 256b, a lens having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in the front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent mischief from being mischievous by the upper left speaker 262 or breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 and inserting an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player, and is less likely to make noise than other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the surface of the side lens 250 having a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and is curved, and is arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. A side inner lens 252 having a diffuser portion 252a composed of a plurality of strip-shaped lenses, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 irradiates the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be light-emittingly decorated.

By the way, the light radiated to the front (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is radiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a toward the inner decorative member 251 is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. At (front), the light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side) converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused. The indirect light reflected from the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the positions shifted from each other. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected in a striped manner with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the direction (approximately orthogonal). Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 extends in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a, which is longer than the width of the slit 251a, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminescent decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Top decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5, and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extending frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extending frame 281c that extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decorative member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a plate-shaped diffuser lens 285 arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. , An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is arranged on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and has substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light-shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the tubular portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287 arranged behind the light-shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the tubular portion 287a. It is provided with an upper central decorative substrate 288 in which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the front are mounted on the front surface.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of upper decorative units 280 arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and on the front surface. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a of the above is mounted, the board cover 291 which covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and the board cover 291 which is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 are covered and have translucency and are predetermined. It is provided with a top and bottom decorative cover 294 that is shaped into a shape.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a whose rear end side is open in the center in the left-right direction. It includes a cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 and shaped into a predetermined shape. ..

In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 shines with light from the outside. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing into the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c facing the frame of the lower extension frame 281c are provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and the axial core of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, the light can be diffusely refracted by the plurality of prisms and band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of lenses concentric on the rear side are formed, and light can be diffusely refracted, so that the rear side is clear. It is invisible to the lens.

Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper center lens 284 can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, in the upper side decorative substrate 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c in the front decoration member 281. It is arranged at the position corresponding to each of the frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can illuminate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example is a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit base 310. The front end of the dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed to the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are opened and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are both front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in the visual direction, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and covers the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the center on the left and right to the right side, and is attached to the plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface and the lower side of the substrate mounting base 320. It is provided with an upper plate decorative substrate 322 on which a plurality of LEDs 322a are mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312 to open the upper side and the rear side, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view, and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the direction, and a dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate main body 324 A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, are located on a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate main body 324 and extends to the right in front view. The lower plate cover 328 having the lock hole 328a facing the lower plate cover 328, and the upper opening 330a formed coaxially with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position on the left and right center left side of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328. A lower plate right side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens below the upper opening 330a and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 extending diagonally to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. The lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, and the protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate from the rear side to allow sound to pass through, and protection. It is provided with a frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having a continuous shape and an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. It is provided with a cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in a disk shape that is gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge toward the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. It can be protected as much as possible. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface thereof. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It includes a ball lending unit 360 that operates a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is prepared. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front), and has a horizontally long rectangular upper plate ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle of the plate unit base 310 in the height direction), and the upper plate. It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and projecting forward and having the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between a pair of lower plate support portions 310e and is fitted with the rear ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular ring-shaped lower plate support in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a tubular shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is equal to the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference of is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to linearly exit the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls. The direction changes, and the guide is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in the front view, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h is in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (shaft support side) of the plate unit 300 bulges forward from the center and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 313 is electrically grounded so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction and into which the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting the operation unit 400, which will be described later, is formed in a stepped shape at the center in the left-right direction in front of the upper plate main body 312 and further lowered from the decorative mounting portion 314b. There is.

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by the plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be diffusely refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, in the assembled state of the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318, the portion that can be seen through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, whereas the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is uncertain.

The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape, similar to the portion on the right side of the front decorative member 316 of the upper plate. It is formed in an integral shape with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), so that light can be diffusely refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. There is. The upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to spread forward in a fan shape in a plan view, a rear end formed linearly in the left-right direction, and a substantially center of the upper surface to be the lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored and metallic plating layer (a matte state as if sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 includes a plate-shaped portion that forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 that extends rearward from the lower end. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and are formed in the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is provided with a plating layer which is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. Further, the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and is a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 extending rearward from the lower end. It has a plate-shaped part that forms a. The opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left cover 334 of the lower plate is made of punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in the metal plate to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted inside.

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 except for the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334. The bottom surface between the two is closed by the lower plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is for operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 and the upper plate ball removing button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the operating piece 342 are operably supported and the plate unit base 310. A contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided with 343a and arranged behind the plate unit base 310 and an upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slidably supports the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the vertical direction and is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310. It is provided with a punching base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. (See 43) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which allows the game ball to be distributed.

In the upper plate ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guidance flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 is used. Can be supplied to.

Further, in the ball pulling flow path 344c of the upper plate ball pulling base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball feeding port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending toward the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are sent from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guidance flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball extraction port 581b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 or the like can absorb the impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is arranged between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left lower cover 334 of the lower plate on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324, and forms the central portion of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Rotate the plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 and the opening / closing shutter 352 that are rotatably supported on the upper surface of the punching base 351 and the lower dish ball punching base 351 and can open / close the lower dish ball punching hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the lower plate ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is provided. There is.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball extraction base 351 are urged by a coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with an abutting pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removing slider 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removing slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 rotates the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b so as to move rearward, and the urging force of the coil spring 356 slides the lower plate ball removal slider 353 forward. You can do it.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. In order to hold the lower plate ball removal slider 353 in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. There is, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slider 353 slides backward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 352b. Matching with 324b, the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball extraction slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slider 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of matching with the drawing hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removing button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b by the coil spring, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball punching hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincident with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit 300. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid cards that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. There is. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan balance display unit 363, and is arranged behind the front cover 365 to which the loan balance display unit 363 is attached and the ball rental button 361. And the ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which the switch operated by the operation of the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. A rear cover 367, which is attached to the rear cover 367, is provided. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310 m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310 m. A transparent front cover 365 that includes a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and projects forward, respectively, and closes the display opening 310n. The loan balance display unit 363 arranged on the rear side can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and is in front of the plate unit 360. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, in the ball lending unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball lending button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (on the player side) from the outer circumference of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his / her hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, and the ball lending button can be noticed. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. It is possible to make the machine reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model pachinko machine), it is possible to reduce the anxiety given to the player and make it an easy-to-select pachinko machine 1 to play. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the press that the player can press. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, which can accept the player's operation according to the game state and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, so that the player can not only drive the game ball but also operate the game ball. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular driven operation unit connected to an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and a lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. The operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, a gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 and an opening 420a through which the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 being fixed to the lower surface. The base is mounted so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass through. It mainly includes a member 420 and a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface while being arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed into a predetermined shape. It includes an inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427. The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass through, and the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface. A dial decorative substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the annulus of the above, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. It includes a 432b, a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by the substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and an inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in an annular shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion 401e (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked to operate the dial. The part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is further provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the center at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The surface is sloped so that the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed tubular button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It includes a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and projects outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction is provided in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and a dial operation unit on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and is larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The characters "Push" are displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the characters can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operating portion holding member 416, and the annular sliding surface is in contact with the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connecting locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and a slit formed between the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c. According to the 410d, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotates and drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in small steps by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410 and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button body 416b and a locking convex portion 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e in which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432 is seen from above, and a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and is locked. It is further provided with a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower concave portion 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer circumference of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in the vertical direction, and the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and the motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the lower side. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions on the outside of the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 projecting to. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, in the leg portion 420e of the base member 420, the positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with the positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later, and the base member 420. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper part The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer circumference in one of the short axis directions (front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (front side in the pachinko machine 1), and the lower end protrudes outward in a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, the locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316. It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from below with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer circumference of the upper cover 422. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portions 424b are provided with the engaging portions 424b. By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a through which the upper cover 422 can pass through in the vertical direction in the center, and an operation unit mounting of the dish unit 300 extending outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted so as to be slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is mounted. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the cover body is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the operation unit 400 is attached. The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential distance corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and the rotation by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. From the detection pattern of the detection piece 410c, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, the operation unit 400 of this example can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating the rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operating unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, and the operation unit 400 Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely used by the player. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. it can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit is also hit. The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, suppressing the concentration of the hitting impact and preventing the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand a bang, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely operated. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, when the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c can receive an impact or a load, so that the impact or the like from the operation units 401 or 405 is dispersed to prevent the impact or the like from concentrating. It is possible to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward from the positions supporting the operation units 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation unit in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 receives an impact from the operating portions 401 and 405 in contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged directly under the impact, so that the operating portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 The portion supporting the plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed) so that the impact from the operating units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view. When the operation unit 401 is struck from above, even if the operation unit holding member 416 holding the dial operation unit 401 deviates from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). As a result, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the production by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414 to appropriately drive the dial operation unit. It is possible to make the production using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation shaft of 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted through the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being directly affected, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a, the dial operation unit 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can come into contact with the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member. It is possible to surely prevent the depression from being lower than 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation unit 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation unit holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from the above.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 can be frequently rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 can be rotationally driven. Even if the amount of heat generated increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414 is heavily loaded. The pachinko machine 1 can fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive means 414 as described above, and can entertain the player. Can be done.

Further, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the above, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, which is more suitable for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensational effect, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 repeatedly rotates forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range to vibrate, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated via the step portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operation feeling for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move without permission, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can move freely to attract the player's attention to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. In addition to making it easier, the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side as well, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the circumference of the axial center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial in the operation unit 400. The roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and the guide to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The characters "PUSH" are not rotated or tilted significantly, and can be easily read from the player side, so that the player can be surely recognized that the pressing operation unit 405 is to perform the pressing operation. be able to.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a diameter smaller than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to each other at the upper end of the operation unit 400. The gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be improved through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and prevent the occurrence of problems such as the dial operation unit 401 becoming difficult to rotate or the pressing operation unit 405 becoming difficult to press due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 in the operating unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which of the dial operating unit 401 is in the circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (pressing a position deviated to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably transmit the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 come into contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further improved.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, there is a case where the contact portion is not inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially dispersed in the outward direction in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the rotation axis, preventing the load from concentrating, and the resistance of the operation unit 400. It is possible to surely improve the load resistance and impact resistance, and also to improve the durability of the operation unit 400, which reduces the occurrence of defects during the game as much as possible and reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not only simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, and forward rotation and reverse rotation can be performed. It can be easily vibrated by repetition, and the operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a bang on the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 51 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment passes through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300 to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. On the front of the handle base 502, which is fixed and cylindrical and whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the handle body 504 which is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and the front surface of the handle body 504. It is provided with a front end cover 506 that is arranged and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end of the handle device 500 are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with the 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. It is provided with a rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is viewed clockwise from the front view via the transmission gear 511. With respect to the auxiliary spring 514 for urging, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the launch stop switch 518 attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate the launch stop switch 518, one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is placed in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). It is provided with a handle return spring 522 that urges the driver to return to the rotating end in the direction of

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a form having a rear end portion that is cylindrically extended rearward from a front end portion that is open on the front side and bulges rearward, and has a rear end portion. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape of the above. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with arc-shaped slits 504a arranged concentrically with its rotation axis, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. By being locked, the handle body 504 is urged to rotate counterclockwise in the front view by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 on one end side.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view viewed from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) to form a door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are electrically plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is driven. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the launch solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 153) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotary drive can be stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before the single-shot button 520 is operated. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are doord like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the links are released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the malfunction of the gaming ball.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and is a cover that communicates with the first ball entrance 542a and the first ball entrance 542a that penetrate in the front-rear direction. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side in the front view toward the front end of the base 542, and the second ball entrance 542c that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. And, inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner in the front view is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the second ball passage 542d is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball entrance 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage 542d. It is provided with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operating piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b, which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball entrance 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544a to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball entrance 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310 g of the plate unit 300 (see FIG. 82).

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. If the game ball launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it can be received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in the front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can be swung by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the swing member 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full tank detection sensor 550 is in a non-detection state. 552 and. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the circulation of game balls.

In this example, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. When the game ball is further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 while the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream of the above is also full, the game balls are circulated to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770. It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 to resist the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the rocking member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. A person is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is not detected, and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. FIG. 54 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 57A is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, FIG. 57B is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 57C is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feed unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover, which are box-shaped and have a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball launching device 650. A ball pulling member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that separates the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 and the ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 583 on the left side of the ball extraction port 581b in front view. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a in which the upper surface of the ball pulling member 583 is lower than the advancing entrance 581a and the upper surface of the partition is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a rotating rod portion 583b that is below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. It comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 583a of the entrance 581a and the ball pulling member 583. It is provided with a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

The ball feed member 584 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a and at the same time the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate with and from the facing holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 from the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the paddle portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a ball feed operating rod 586 that swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. It is provided with a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction to transmit the ball feed member. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that swings away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 accepts one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives the ball feed member 584. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is provided with a moment such that the weight portion 583c rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by contacting the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the abutting piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working paddle 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the 381a and the ball ejection port 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball extraction port 381b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the plate unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating paddle 583c of the ball pulling member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, so that the ball pulling member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball can be moved. The partition portion 583a can prevent it from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 has a horizontally long rectangular shape as a whole in the rear view, and is located on the left side of the tip in the rear view from substantially the center to the opposite side in the vertical direction. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending by a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side side) as a boundary. A V-shape formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 (rearward) so as to move away from the upper piece 588b. It is provided with a shaped cut portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 has a cut portion 588d by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed like this.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become like. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 The portion corresponding to the portion where the ball is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, is formed in a form of communicating with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is supplied to the gaming area of the game board 4 by the hitting ball launching device 650. When the ball is driven into the 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the ball launcher 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempts to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement locus of the illegal game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting with the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 side through the hitting ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move in the upper left direction (upper right direction in the rear view). Then, in order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the back view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view) at the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. In this state, friction and shearing force act on the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire rod Iw (see FIG. 57 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw is attenuated by friction acting on the wire rod Iw or the like, it is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 without invading the game area 1100. It will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent game ball I with the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. It is designed to prevent it from being damaged. Even if the fraudulent game ball I invades the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588 as described above, so that the fraudulent act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the invasion of the inside, it is possible to prevent cheating.

As described above, according to this example, after storing the game balls in the upper plate 301 and supplying the game balls to the ball feed unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650, so that the game window of the door frame 5 is operated. The game will be performed in the game area 1100 that can be visually recognized via the 101, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 and ball feed solenoid) can be placed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Since the ball feed unit 580 equipped with the ball feed unit (585 etc.) and the discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583) is arranged, not only the ball feed member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 but also the ball feed member 584 and the ball launching device 650 are possible. The number of game balls remaining on the ball feed member 584 side should be reduced as much as possible when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341 in a state of being close to each other. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 provided with the ball pulling member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the upper plate 301 from becoming full with the game balls at an early stage by the operation. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and the plate unit 300 can be miniaturized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game can be relatively played. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball feeding member 583, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 are separately compared with the ball feeding member 583. The 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and problems occur in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the one in which the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side. It is not necessary to configure the transmission mechanism (upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pulling button 341 to the ball pulling member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (as compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened. By shutting off the precision ball removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is consumed early and malfunctions or is damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be ejected from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game ball from the plate, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

Further, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition portion 583a also moves in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be miniaturized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing member). The durability of 583) can be increased. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to repel even if it collides with the partition portion 583a, and the repellent of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b communicate with each other by its own weight, if a problem occurs in the partition portion 583a or the upper plate ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition portion 583a is rotated. Rotates due to its own weight, so that the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are communicated with each other, and the game ball in the upper plate 301 launches a ball even though the upper plate ball extraction button 341 is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being sent to the device 650 side, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem. It can be moved to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating paddle portion 583b in the ball pulling member 583, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent by the rotating paddle portion. By dispersing by 583b or absorbing by bending of the rotating paddle portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball pulling member 583 can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the left and right of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged. The movement in the direction can be minimized, the passage of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 is improved, and the game ball can be discharged satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cut portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. By pulling the wire rod Iw quickly (strongly) with respect to the above, the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the momentum of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent the wire rod Iw from entering the game area 1100. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts by the fraudulent game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 provided with the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The rear-bent upper piece 588b can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 injures the operator during assembly or the like. It can be prevented from being injured.

Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent rearward across the dividing wire 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. As a result, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It can be suppressed from increasing.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It includes a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a arranged in the upper parts on both the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement piece extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a piece 592b.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on the door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. To drive the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 when viewed from the front. Handle device 500 is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to.

The appearance of the door frame 5 on both sides of the game window 101 is significantly different, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side has a metallic sharp and artificial appearance due to the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240. It has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 has a different amount of protrusion forward between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front When viewed from the side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, which can give a different impression depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become like. That is, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the illusion of a different model of pachinko machine can be obtained. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 which can enhance the appealing power to the player and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical to the left and right, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in the left-right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island equipment feels flat and solid. The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which have different forms, are arranged alternately to give a rhythmic impression and give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in the units 200, 240, 280, 300, etc., thereby causing the game window 101 to emit light. It is possible to illuminate and decorate with any luminescent color so as to surround the door. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254b, 256 can be turned on and off to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on the door frame]
Subsequently, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 It is possible to decorate the outer circumference of the window with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the above is formed by one smooth and loosely curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214,216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is said to be an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. to make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from the light emitting LEDs 210a, 210b and the like toward the player side by the substrate, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be prevented from becoming too dark. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper center lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper center lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. It is provided with four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side of the front view is covered with the upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. The extension frame lens portion 282c in the above and the upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288 are provided. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decorative substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extension frame lens portion 282c can be light-emitting and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper center decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, which is continuous with the appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In this plate unit 300, the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged behind the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate front decorative member 316 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery of the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be light-emittingly decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged outside the first annular group 102 (within the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, the game window 101 is substantially concentric so as to surround the game window 101. It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decorations. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the ring-shaped by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The luminescent decoration can be luminescent so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is designated as a notification group 105, and by appropriately emitting light of the LED 214c, a game is played. Various information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is said that the upper center group 106 is used to illuminate and decorate the upper center of the lens. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated. In addition, the reference for the ring-shaped light emitting decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration that becomes a point. Further, the LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits light and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be light-emitting and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged under the game window 101 causes the upper plate 301 to emit light and decorate. It is said to be dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the plate unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 press the operation unit 400. It is said that the operation unit group 109 is to be decorated with light emission. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be light-emitting and decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be set. It is possible to inform the player.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a provided in the door frame 5 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204, 246 (radiant lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in the front-rear and left-right directions. Further, in the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, the four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 in between, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b are arranged as a set. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c to which the 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, it is tripled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs having high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in the actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As the light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color), the light emission effect spreads outward around the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light in the same color or a similar color). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LED provided on the game board 4 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first ring group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 The LED of the second ring group 103 located on the outside makes it possible to produce a more expressive light emission, which can strongly attract the attention of the player and entertain the player. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light of each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light moves toward the central lens 284, or the light moves along the outer circumference of the game window 101 from the upper central lens 284. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is produced, or the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By making the game window 101 emit light substantially uniformly, the radial group 104 emits light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by individually emitting light from each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

Further, by emitting light of the upper center group 106 and the upper center side group 105, a chance has arrived for the player and a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probability change game state, a time saving game state, a probability change time reduction game state). , Etc.) can be suggested.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating and decorating the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation can be performed. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce a rich light emission.

[1-3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. , The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. The ball launching device 650, which is attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 to drive the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. When the prize ball unit 700 for the purpose and the door frame 5 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 are opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the flow of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 is blocked. It is provided with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape in the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D of the main body frame base 600, the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and the workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, the upper bending projecting piece 167 projecting rearward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side projecting rearward from the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which the outer bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward from the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 are provided. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602) to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is attached with metal fittings for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and a launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, in the left direction and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an opposition wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 on the upper side of the opening 614. It is provided with 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotation position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a and a fixing piece 690a that spread in a fan shape around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600. It includes an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is axially supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in the front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released so that the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction on the inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are lined up in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602 The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 that hangs down from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward in the above direction and allows game balls to be distributed. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later. It is now in circulation.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 are rotatably supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 and diagonally upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so that the door frame 5 can be opened and closed, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted and the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. It includes a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the edges. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the plate-shaped mounting portion 642a and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. The door frame 642a is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion in the front view and regulates the rotating end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

In the lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The door is positioned coaxially with the metal fitting 642c, and the door is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Slide the door frame downward once so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap each other, and then slide the shaft pin 155 upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3 C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654 attached so as to be mounted, the hammer 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. Hammer tip of ball hammer 656 between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, extending diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a paddle portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the paddle portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a in between. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 98, when the ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the rail 1111 and the lower end. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660, thereby hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received at the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball striking device 650, the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a drive strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. By turning (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island equipment side. The tank rail unit 730, which is arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stores the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720, is aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 are paid out. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It mainly includes a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600. And is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear wall. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to pass through the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b in the front-rear direction, and the back surface. It is provided with a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper part, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721 and the outer peripheral wall portion 722 rising upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only on the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side and opens downward from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. A prize ball formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall portion 722, the eaves portion 724 extending to the eaves portion 724, the rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion 722. A mounting portion 726 for mounting the tank 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 of the prize ball base 710 is provided.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. In a plan view, the right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) is formed so as to incline toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is tilted so that The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward to the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 74), which project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, are provided.

The end of the tank rail 731 on the right side (open side) of the front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that is capable of advancing and retreating into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap between the ball holding plate 734 and the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer circumference, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with fine grooves that penetrate vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine grooves. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. When the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734a into the tank rail 730. By inserting it into, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. The 741a, the distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are connected to each other and bent in a substantially square shape for rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) of the rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support that is arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the second gear 746, which meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to the opposite side of the 747 so as to be integrally rotatable and has a plurality of detection slits 749a (three in this example) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. The counting sensor 751 for measuring the above, the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753, the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. I have.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the sensor board 753 from the rear side, and the supply passage ground capable of contacting the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the metal fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. It is equipped with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (left side when viewed from the rear) below the rearwardly bulging position in the supply passage 741a, and is outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. The switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, the sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and the sensor mounting portion 741f below the prize ball passage 741c so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the working piece of the ball-cutting switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the ball-out switch 750 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball out switch 750 (the ball out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. A ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and a button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 for supporting the attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a is removed through the supply passage ground fitting 757. Can be done.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the upper part of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed in the recess 748a one by one, and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit, etc. are input to the payout control board 4110, or a ball ejection switch 860b is operated to operate the payout motor 744. Is rotated so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is rotated. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the third gear 747 on the front side, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. Together with the third gear 747, the payout rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 747 are fixed. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank distribution unit 770 described later, the main frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. It can be discharged to the rear side outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the plate unit 300. At the same time, when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a which is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 773 is discharged forward and in front of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball from a position away from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the right side of the rear view toward the front side. ), And a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 forward and opens on the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end of the front end of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball ejection passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received by the extraction port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 778 are discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end of the front view. It is provided with a ball outlet 779 which is opened at a position behind the full ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball is designed to communicate with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and is connected to the dish unit 300. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. The game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in a normal state. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal exit 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is above the plate unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls and the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot come out from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts moving laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775 and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 776 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the plate 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. ..

As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the game ball to be paid out directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when the upper plate 301 is full. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. It becomes a game ball that can be directly driven by the 650, and the stored amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be done. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be made to play a game. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide game area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

Further, since the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate and the reception port (first ball entrance). Even if there is only one 542a and the second ball entrance 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole for changing the door frame 5 can be dealt with. It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and provide various pachinko machines 1 at low cost.

Further, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 provided with only one storage plate. Even if the ball is exchanged for, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage plate via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates. ..

Further, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to concentrate the player on the driving operation of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the entrance 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball entrance 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates, the storage plate can be used. It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls by deepening the storage plate, so that the player does not have to worry about the storage amount frequently. And it is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 equipped with a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with a game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball exit 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. If the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, even if the storage plate is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. Since the position where the full passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are placed not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full passage 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be increased to a limited number and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of the game balls staying (stored) in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the actual storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from being reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the full tank branch unit 770 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At that time, the location of the ball jam can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, the defect can be solved at an early stage, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The opening / closing shutter 792 is held so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 that slides the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 are raised via the opening / closing crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in a front view and rotatably supports an opening / closing crank 793 that extends in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer periphery on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the opening / closing shutter 792 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which the shutter is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front by disassembling the substrate unit. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the vertical wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89A is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG.

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 mounted on the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, the main relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side relay. It is provided with a terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a form that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 projecting from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged on the upper side of the shielding wall portion 811 at a position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813. A tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 that penetrate in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). A box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830 is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. As a result, it is possible to form a storage recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-shaped passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and move forward. It is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deeper bass with respect to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a storage recess formed by the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the bottom surface. As a result, when the firing power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodating space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b and the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The storage space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the heat insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is the heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830, that is, the entire firing power board box 830 can be replaced.

Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive launch by the launch solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launch power supply board 831 is easy. By doing so, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 extremely easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates early and has a life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island equipment such as a game hall, but the charging / discharging is repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Therefore, its life is extremely long as compared with the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life relatively early due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging.

Further, since the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 that holds the game board 4, the capacity for changing the driving characteristics Even if you try to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. It is possible to make it difficult to commit fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that intentionally changes the driving strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the firing power supply board 831, and by making it difficult to commit fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to prevent a player who is frustrated from developing into fraud such as cheating.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 is removable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is fraudulent, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the fraudulent operation is performed. It can be eliminated, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the person in the game.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. , When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the firing power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the driving characteristics, the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be replaced with a new game. It can be considered to match the board 4. Therefore, since the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 for the island equipment such as the game hall when replacing the launch power supply board 831. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for replacement, and it is possible to replace in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) is removable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the circuit board, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the hall side and the like.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the launch control unit 4120 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above, so that the firing power supply board 831 can be immediately replaced even if a problem occurs due to deterioration. It can be replaced to eliminate the problem, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding port 601 in order to be attached and detached. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing fraudulent activity is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. It is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being cheated, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high defense against cheating.

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the firing power supply is supported. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the substrate box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply substrate box 830 and exerts the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 tends to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, the problem can be solved early, and the game is interrupted. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side of the center on the left and right in the front view, and receives the game balls discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4. The unit 841, the discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving part 841 downward, and the front of the side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving part 841 and The front box accommodating portion 843 that is open upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed toward the front side and can accommodate the front end of the power supply board box 850. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844.

In this power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It is formed, and flows through the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, passes through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810, and is the rear side of the board unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to the pachinko machine 1 and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 will be passed through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged to.

Further, in the power supply board box holder 840, the front box accommodating portion 843 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 form a firing power supply board. A storage recess for accommodating the box 830 can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, the power supply board box 850 has a vertical wall portion 850b slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal with the extended wiring cord is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force that pushes the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided on both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction when assembled with each other are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820, and the board unit base 810. When attached to, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially identical to each other.

Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding to the rear side from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such as disconnecting from the 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. It is easy to remove the connector and maintenance such as replacement of the board can be easily performed.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending condition of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the vertical wall portion 850b is located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that the vertical wall portion 850b is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the vertical wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 850b on the power supply board 851, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, etc. that cause a problem from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and the defense against fraudulent activities can be enhanced. It has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent a shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from the power supply board 851 and to cause a power failure due to breakage, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a problem.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to connect the wiring cord 854. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction that disconnects the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization from occurring.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided on both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 is used to bring the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b toward the standing wall portion 850b, it is difficult to remove the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to ensure that the above-mentioned action and effect are exhibited, and after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to perform a series of operations continuously, simplify the work process related to assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It includes a 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation cutting portion 863 must be cut before the box base 861 and the cover 862 can be separated, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball ejection switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. On the board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a and a CR unit connection terminal 874a which faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a substrate box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the substrate base 871 together with the connection connection terminal plate cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, CR unit, etc. installed on the island equipment side is displayed when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1. The status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. A locking claw 871i that locks the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871i. ing.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall is said to be an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the rear in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two ridges 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged on the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the substrate base 871. A rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a to the front (board base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d are in contact with the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions are held. It includes a pair of hook-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873 g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked into the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. It is provided with a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be held detachably. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is formed by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit installed on the island equipment side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the substrate box cover 875 of the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the substrate base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871 g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b forward from both left and right ends. It is provided with an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the substrate box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective contact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 88, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

Then, as shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The ridge 871e and the outer piece 871c of the above, and the outer wall portion 873c and the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side wall 875c exists respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized activity against the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 is a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the substrate box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. An impact wall 875c having a length straddling between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, which makes it difficult to cheat and deters. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrodes, and can prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are arranged from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a space or the like and the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. For example, even if you try to invade an illegal tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal board Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are reliably prevented. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of capable.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be reliably prevented.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. A substrate box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through-hole 875b corresponding to the above to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the parts of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported by the board base 871 to form a gap and an illegal tool is inserted, the illegal tool is connected by the impact wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection terminal board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against cheating. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. It is possible to prevent the cover from being distorted and to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to cheat and making it highly deterrent.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, it can be dealt with. Since the rear side of the opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body is covered with the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( It is not possible to insert a needle-shaped electrode into the gap of the connector body from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and it has high security capability. Can be.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform fraudulent acts, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It can be kept protected by, and it is not possible to cheat on the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a cannot be used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such things.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an illegal tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal board 874 itself replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like have been replaced with illegal ones. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activity, and it is also easier to detect fraudulent activity, so it is possible to hesitate to commit fraudulent activity to those who commit fraudulent activity, and to enhance deterrence against fraudulent activity. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are in a state of facing the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are the door frame together with the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, the front side of the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is covered with the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 is a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 includes the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side and the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 288 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400. , 290, 322, 430, 432, and the dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided in the operation unit 400, and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. It is for relaying.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90 (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism on the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism on the back cover as viewed from the rear side by disassembling. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 so that it cannot be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower engaging piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. A vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 and the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking port that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side to form a main body 902. The fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and the guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and is supported along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 projects the fastening member 924 to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be obtained. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, so that the back cover 900 is not screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b and the fastening member 924 is rotated, so that the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body portion 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve maintainability.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902 and a confirmation opening penetrating in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection notch 910 in the front view. A 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view are provided.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c, the test terminal 4100f, etc. of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 are passed through the connection notch 910. Is designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management sticker 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and the back cover 900 is used for confirmation. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, it is possible to check the operation, appearance, management status, and the like of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at positions slightly to the left of the center when viewed from the front, which are wide and elongated in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 are after the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the side so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4 while the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3 because the game board 4 is held so as to be playable. Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing it from falling off.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been released from fastening in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , It can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is in an inclined state with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a is surely in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 against the guide member 923 so as to be playable is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented from coming off. The fastening member 924 can be movably held by the guide member 923 by the gap between the two and the elongated hole 923b.

Further, an accommodating recess capable of accommodating the holding member 925 is provided around the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the cover fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodating recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of defects. You can make it look good as well as make it look good.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-bonded to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be fastened by simply pulling it as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activities can be obtained.

Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 and to move the male screw portion 924 straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the locking port 923 along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the heart, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and then the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 to fasten only one place, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by engaging the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side (rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 of the back cover 900 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, simply by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 3, even if the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is rotatably supported. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. As shown in the figure, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed vertically near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4 is provided.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 extends in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600, and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a side plate piece 952a and a front view right from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front end to the front of the side plate piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the rightward direction (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with a front component 1110 in the game board 4. The left side of the front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 108).

In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character-shaped projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for performing fraudulent acts from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. (See FIG. 108). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a, and the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, assuming that the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the above is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the shaft support side U shape. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the shape projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 in contact with the door frame 5, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped open. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame 3 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, and the side security plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (shaft support side) is made of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost related to the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, as will be described in detail later, the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is provided at one place between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be locked with the hook cover 165 of the above. Even if the open side is scooped by an illegal tool such as a bar, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from widening, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly scooped open. it can.

Further, the rear end of the side plate piece 952a in the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side plate piece 952a in the front-rear direction becomes longer. Since the flexural rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and the side security plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating. ..

Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extrusion mold material, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and at the same time, defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are caused as compared with the case where a metal plate is bent. The number can be reduced as much as possible, and the side security plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 94B is a sliding rod for a door frame and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the locking device. Is a rear perspective view showing, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device disassembled and viewed later, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. , FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the locking device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 on the right side (open side) side of the front view, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 that are attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, so that the game area can be further increased. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped base 1001 is attached with the open side having a U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult for fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate up and down on the closing side (front side) opposite to the opening side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side project forward. It is provided with a locking projection 1004 and the like.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screw fixing portion 1003 is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the screw device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008, which will be described later, and near the upper side of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the open side (front side) are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper part and the lock locking hole. The lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because the structure is such that the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with a screw while being inserted into the 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side projects from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is in contact with the surface 1001b.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction at the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame housed, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 94. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, respectively. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020 penetrating the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, a spring locking piece 1021, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is adapted to advance and retreat. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected from the front end toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations above and below for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. It is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the end side rotates.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions above and below the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally use a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention member 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by the lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on its plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projectile 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated on the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above the front surface. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. It swings (in the clockwise direction in FIG. 97 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Therefore, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And are bored, respectively, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be rotatably connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rivet 1040, a guide protrusion 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rivet 1040 is provided. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is designed so that the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending operation of the rivet 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 comes into contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become like.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating below the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the above hook member 1051 and a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivets, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for a rivet that penetrates in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion. An elongated hole 1061, a descending engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engaging hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower part of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated in the lower hook member 1052, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. It is for engaging in such a manner. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving door 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. For the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame while passing the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in a superposed state. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure of the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96 (A). The closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are engaged with each other, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (B). The tip of the first engaging projection piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 96 (A)), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050 and 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up and ascending the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 can be pulled by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a lowered state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 96A), but the door frame. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and moves in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be done. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 97. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engaging notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is performed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise rotation direction shown around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 97 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is the main body that prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are completely covered by being housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent tools from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. , A piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside, and other fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. It is extremely simple because it has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed together. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole that penetrates the piece 1008 and is screwed may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) simply by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and a sliding rod for a door frame 1040 and a sliding rod for a main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) and a first side wall 540. A structure for storing the 1050 may be used, and the same effect as that of the lock device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall of the prize ball base 710. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the 710b and the game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is abbreviated as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it is provided with a transparent back cover 900 arranged on the same surface, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. With the pachinko machine 1 that can visually recognize the rear side surface and can easily inspect (visually inspect) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. can do.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the front side to 601 even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an illegal device, a tool, or the like for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find a fraudulent device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to install an illegal device or the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island equipment on which the game machine 4 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 may come into contact with the game board 4. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and prevent problems from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is set to a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 65) from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the main body. Since the depth D of the frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. The action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to form a flat shape. The attachment work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being caught or in contact with other members in the island equipment to be installed. It can be prevented to prevent a problem from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, it is possible to use a cushioning material having a simple shape when transporting the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) of the pachinko machine. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 or the like of the back cover 900. , It is possible to prevent the heat from being accumulated from the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the control of the game from becoming unstable due to the heat and the deformation of members such as synthetic resin from causing problems. be able to. Further, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, the slit 916 or the like is passed through. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the invasion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 107. FIG. 98 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. Further, FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game in which FIG. 103 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board seen from the rear of FIG. 106. It is an exploded perspective view of.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which the game ball is driven is divided by the player operating the handle device 500, and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front surface. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses the main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls the game content performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is provided with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 will be omitted and details will be described later. Further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 117 and the like).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction of the front view to the diagonally upper left side of the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutting portion 1114 where the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1113 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates clockwise in the front view and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. A backflow prevention member 1116, which is urged by a spring (not shown), is provided.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 fires the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on the extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted into the winning openings (general winning opening, starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening, etc.) of the table unit 2000 described later, the game is played. It flows down to the lower end of the area 1100, is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and is guided from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. It is designed to be discharged to.

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. Rolling downward in the opposite direction, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. When it falls, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the abutting portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. At the same time, the game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The rear projection piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite side of the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even with the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the security rear projection piece 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in a row, and a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the front view. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board. By locking the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, in the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110, with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is viewed from the front. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in the front view and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification. Although detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is omitted, when the game board 4 is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is provided for the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening the game boards 4 to each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the game board 4 from being illegally removed.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The notch 1152 for the ball passage having the same shape as the notch 1122 for the ball passage of the front component 1110 and the rear protruding portion of the function display unit 1180 which penetrates in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed in the vicinity of the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side being opened downward (see FIG. 101). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is notched so as to penetrate from the right end of the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, and is within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the table unit 2000 is attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and when assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Board holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160. It is designed to be discharged downward from the out ball discharge unit 1161. The out-ball ejection unit 1161 is located directly above the ejection ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends at both the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The tips of the plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and then are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion into which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the board holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. A matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end portion of the substrate base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and from the fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160 and the right end of the rear view of the substrate cover 1172. It includes an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end of the rear view, two at the top and two at the bottom with the elastic fixing piece 1175 sandwiched between them, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealing seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealing seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a sealing seal affixed across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated. It needs to be peeled off, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent acts from being carried out.

Further, in the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are skillfully crafted, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 has high security performance. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and the display unit 1181 and the front constituent member 1110 which are arranged so as to be visible from the player side on the front surface of the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end of the front view. The game status indicator 1183, which consists of one LED, and the game status indicator 1183, which consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side, displays the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2201. The first special symbol 1184 and the first special lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2201, is the first special symbol. The first special symbol display 1185, which consists of one 7-segment LED for displaying as, and the first special symbol display 1185, which are arranged diagonally to the right and are drawn by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2587b. From the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result as the second special symbol, and the two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186. It is provided with a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has a normal symbol storage display 1188 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the gate portion 2585a by the game ball, and a lower side of the normal symbol storage display 1188. A normal symbol display 1189 composed of one LED for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball passing through the gate portion 2585a arranged on the side as a normal symbol, and an oblique upper right of the normal symbol storage display 1188. Arranged side by side, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509 is displayed. It is equipped with a round indicator 1190, which consists of two LEDs for the purpose.

The game status display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the emission color of the emission and the lighting / blinking Depending on the combination, various gaming states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, probability variation time saving state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

Further, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2201. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has two first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b composed of predetermined LEDs, and is held by the lighting / blinking pattern of the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b. The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both light up when the number of holds is four. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2587b. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol storage display 1187 has two second special symbol storage lamps 1187 and 1187b composed of predetermined LEDs, and is held by the lighting / blinking pattern of the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b. The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned off. When the number of holds is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of holds is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both lit. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first is based on the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The result of the special lottery and the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color to emit light and lighting / blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is changed for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of held (stored) ordinary symbols (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a is arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By turning on ~ 1188d in sequence, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp is turned on to make a round in a "big hit" game. The number can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, and the normal symbol storage of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the functional display board 1191 (see FIG. 153). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured to consist of eight LED groups. Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed by the function display unit 1180, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, and the movement of the game ball, It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by devoting itself to movable production and production images.

[1-4F. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from that of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, glass, metal, or the like. It is made of an inorganic plate of. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engaging step portion 1213 is formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, although the details will be described later, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, and is on the front side with respect to the openings. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (not shown).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of the above-mentioned wooden board (in this example, about about the same thickness). It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a thickness of 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It is mainly provided with a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged in the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward it and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the mounting boss of the front component member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression (the amount of the depression). Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 114 and the like) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of the (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is arranged with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and capable of screwing a predetermined screw in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c on the front surface of the back box 3010 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having an appropriate diameter is adjusted according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed by mixing a large diameter hole and a small diameter hole. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the lightening portion 1230 reduces the weight of the panel holder 1220. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within that range, the panel holder 1220 Since the front surface is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 is smoothly guided. It has become so. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the figure, the lightening portion 1230 is formed so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, there is an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a lower end that penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the front view and downwards. A ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and suppress the increase in the cost for planting the obstacle nail. You can do it.

Further, in the game panel 1200 of this example, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. At the same time, the table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit 2000 is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit 2000.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. , The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply exchanging only the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of the previous component]
Next, the front component 1110A having a form different from that of the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. In the game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. 103 to 105. The configuration is the same as that of the examples of FIGS. 103 to 105, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the above front component 1110 in a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the pre-component 1110, the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). It is prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending clockwise from the out port guide surface 1115 to the abutting portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed to be the same as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the abutting portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arc shape is formed from the abutting portion 1114 to directly above the certificate stamp affixing portion 1125 on the right side arranged directly under the abutting portion 1114, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a straight line inclined so as to be lowered toward the out port guide surface 1115.

In the front component 1110A of this example, the game area 1100 can be secured wider than the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. You can do it.

In the examples of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front constituent member 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 100 and 10 show the rear side of the front constituent member 1110A. A game panel 1150 made of a single plate as shown in 101 may be attached.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the security structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen later with the game board housed in the main body frame.

First, as shown in FIG. 108, the security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side (left side in front view). It is composed of a metal side security plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 (1110A) and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. The side surface security plate 950 has a plate-shaped side plate piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending inward (open side) substantially at right angles from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A middle piece 952c extending from the side plate piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the piece 952b and the front end piece 952b, and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It has been increased so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (shaft support side). In the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft branch portion 156 and the lower shaft branch portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is increased through the gap. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (entered), and the front end piece 952b is used as the shaft support. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side from moving away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out, and the main body frame can be prevented from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against 3.

Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame are increased, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an illegal tool, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side plate piece 952a of the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, it is assumed that the main body frame base 600 behind the rear end of the side plate piece 952a Even if is destroyed, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot be inserted into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a, and the illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side frame plate 12 so as to cover the outside of the side security plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to fully counter the vandalism of. Further, in general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side. From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the side plate piece 952c from the rear end, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be used as the game board 4. It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed. In addition, since it is possible to easily find an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the illegal device, and it is possible to enhance the deterrent against fraudulent acts. ing.

Further, since the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance or model change. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to / from 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust, dust, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, it is possible to prevent some troubles from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 117. FIG. 110 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally right front, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of each of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed diagonally from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at a substantially center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, and FIG. 117 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right side.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated by the player operating the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A that partitions the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to be driven in, and a frame-shaped front component 1110A that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A so as to close the game area 1100 and has a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIGS. 114 and 115, etc.) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100.

The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of wooden plywood such as plywood.

Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back unit 3000 from the player side to the rear side. A main liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visibly attached and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a board holder 1160 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a board holder 1160. It includes a main control board box 1170 mounted on the rear surface.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is arranged in the lower part of the game area 1100, the attacker unit 2100 arranged at the upper right of the front view of the out port 1151, and on the left side of the attacker unit 2100, directly above the out port 1151. The start port unit 2200, the front side unit 2300 extending in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side of the start port unit 2200, and the function display unit 1180 attached to the front side unit 2300 and capable of displaying the game state. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 to open the front side, and an opening 3010b is formed on the rear wall 3010a so that the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. It includes a back box 3010, a panel relay board 3020 attached to the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, a lamp drive board 3021, a motor drive board 3023, and a front lamp relay board 3025.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back lower middle effect unit 3100 mounted in the back box 3010 and having a sub liquid crystal display device 3111, a back lower left effect unit 3200 mounted on both left and right sides of the back lower middle effect unit 3100, and a back. The lower right effect unit 3300, the back lower left effect unit 3200, the ball discharge unit 3400 attached to the front of the back lower right effect unit 3300, the back rear effect unit 3500 attached to both the left and right sides in the back box 3010, and the back. It includes a back left effect unit 3600 and a back right effect unit 3700 arranged on the front side of the back effect unit 3500, and a back surface effect unit 3800 attached to the front side of the back effect unit 3500.

Further, on the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, although details will be described later, peripheral control accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 153) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150. A board box 1910 is provided.

In the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150 so that the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the player side substantially in the center of the game area 1100. There is. At least a part of each of the left and right ends of the center accessory 2500 extends to the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and divides the game area 1100 into upper and lower parts. Although the details will be described later, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 can flow down the left and right outside of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the game area 1100, an area on the upper left of the front view of the center accessory 2500 and an area from the lower side to the substantially center in the vertical direction on the left side are formed in a relatively wide area in which the game ball can be distributed. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in these areas in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is driven into the left side of the front view, that is, the left route 1100L side from the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of protrusions of the center accessory 2500 are projected. It passes between the sections 2512 and flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when entering the warp inlet 2503 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the distribution member distributes to either the warp outlet 2505 side supplied to the stage 2506 or the discharge port 2508 side returned to the game area 1100. It is supplied to 2520 and distributed to either one. As a result, the player can be thrilled by being concerned about whether or not the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2503 is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side (stage 2506 side) by the distribution member 2520. You can entertain the movement of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the game ball is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side with a high probability.

The game balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied to the stage 2506. The game ball supplied to the stage 2506 rolls left and right on the stage 2506 and then is released into the game area 1100 so that the movement different from the movement by the obstacle nail can be enjoyed and the chance exit of the stage 2506. When the game ball is released from the 2506d into the game area 1100, it is possible to win a prize in the first start port 2201 of the start port unit 2200 with a high probability.

Further, when the game ball driven to the left route 1100L side does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it enters the advance entrance 2507 and enters the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 below the distribution member 2520. Be released. The game ball that has been driven into the left route 1100L side of the game area 1100 and released from the discharge port 2508 of the center accessory 2500 is guided to the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 by the left shelf portion 2302 of the front side unit 2300. , There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300.

On the other hand, when the game ball is driven to the right side of the front view, that is, to the right route 1100R side from the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the outer circumference on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100 are formed. It enters the attacker passage 2509a opened near the abutting portion 1114 of the front component 1110A through the narrow gap of the second starting port unit 2580, and is discharged directly above the gate portion 2585a of the second starting port unit 2580. That is, by hitting right, the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2585a with an extremely high probability.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal lottery result is drawn and executed in an extremely short time, so that the normal lottery is performed. If the result is "normal hit", the door member 2589 rotates to allow the game ball to be accepted into the second starting port 2587b, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2585a is awarded to the second starting port 2587b. be able to. If the result of the normal lottery is "normal loss", the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 that closes the second starting port 2587b, and the guide member 2584 causes the attacker unit 2100 to go to the second position. It is released to the big winning opening 2102 side. Therefore, by hitting right, it is possible to directly aim at the second starting opening 2587b and the first winning opening 2102.

Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, a lottery of the special lottery result is performed, and a special advantageous game state occurs in which the player such as a big hit game is advantageous. When the lottery is drawn, the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509 arranged in the attacker passage 2509a can accept the game ball in a predetermined pattern. Then, when the first prize opening 2102 or the second prize opening 2509 becomes acceptable, by hitting right, there is an extremely high probability that the game ball will hit the first prize opening 2102 or the second prize opening 2509. Can be won.

As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, it is possible to play games with different impressions on the right side and the left side of the center accessory 2500, and it is possible to provide various games and not get bored. Can be done.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 has an attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper right side of the out port 1151 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the left-right direction in the game area 1100. A start port unit 2200 located in the center directly above the out port 1151 and attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a front side arranged on the left side of the start port unit 2200 and extending substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in an arc shape. A unit 2300, a function display unit 1180 mounted substantially in the center of the front side unit 2300 in the vertical direction, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. , Is equipped.

The attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 has a general winning opening 2101 that can always accept a game ball driven into the game area 1100, and a first large variable winning opening 2101 arranged below the general winning opening 2101. It is equipped with a winning opening 2102. The details of the first large winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 will be described later, but the acceptance of the game ball is performed according to the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. It will be possible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a first starting port 2201a capable of constantly accepting a game ball driven into the game area 1100 on the upper right side of the first large winning opening 2102. (Not shown in FIGS. 118 and 119). Further, a sensor (not shown) similar to the first start port sensor 3422 that detects the game ball received in the first start port 2201 as described later is also provided in the first start port 2201a. As described above, the game ball that has been hit right and passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 when it is not received by the second starting port 2587b, and the guide member 2584 causes the attacker unit 2100 to flow down. The first starting port 2201a is arranged at a position where it can be received until the game ball reaches the first winning opening 2102, although it is discharged to the first winning opening 2102 side. As a more detailed arrangement position, the game balls released to the first large winning opening 2102 side by the guiding member 2584 have a predetermined entering ratio (for example, about 1/20 to 1/5) of the first starting opening 2201a. It is preferable that the position is such that the ball enters the ball.

In this way, the first starting port 2201a is arranged on the flow path of the game ball that can enter the second starting port 2587b, so that the player can play in a big hit game or in an advantageous state (high probability time saving state described later). In a mode that does not require a special game technique when a right-handed hit is made, and in a mode in which entry of the ball cannot be avoided (in other words, a mode in which the player cannot select the recipient of the game ball). , The first starting port 2201a is characterized in that a game ball is received. The processing performed by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2201a (for example, paying out three prize balls for each ball entered, executing the first special lottery, etc.) is the first starting port, which will be described later. Since it is the same as the case of accepting the game ball to 2201, the description will be omitted below by the process relating to the first starting port 2201 unless it is referred to individually.

Further, the situation in which the game ball is expected to enter the first starting port 2201a is a game state in which the game is performed by right-handed hitting, and specifically, during a big hit game and in an advantageous state (time saving state described later). ). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the other normal gaming states (non-time saving state described later), the majority of the gaming balls hit the gaming balls with such a strength that they do not reach the right side of the center accessory 2500. The operation (so-called "left-handed" or "heavenly") is recommended, and the game proceeds by inserting the game ball into the first starting port 2201. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to expect the game ball to be accepted into the first starting port 2201a by hitting right even in the normal game state, but "left hit" or "heaven" From the viewpoint of game specifications, it is not preferable that the game ball enters the first starting port 2201a by "hit" rather than the game ball entering the first starting port 2201 by "hit". More specifically, if the ball entry rate of the first starting port 2201a by "right-handed" becomes too high, it is more advantageous for the player to hit right-handed even in the normal gaming state. Therefore, there is a risk that the original driving operation of the gaming machine cannot be protected. Therefore, the arrangement of the first starting port 2201a is not determined based only on the above-mentioned "predetermined ball entry ratio", and the game progress recommended in the normal game state ("left hit" or "heaven hit"). It is desired that the rate of entering the game ball into the first starting port 2201a by "right-handed" is lower than the rate of entering the game ball into the first starting port 2201. By arranging the first starting port 2201a so as to satisfy such a condition, the player is made to keep the original game method of the pachinko machine 1, that right-handed hitting is recommended only during the big hit game and in the advantageous state. be able to.

Further, although the details of the start port unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described later, the start port unit 2200 is provided with a first start port 2201 that opens upward and can always receive a game ball. The first starting port 2201 is located substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and directly below the chance exit 2506d in the stage 2506 of the center accessory 2500, and has a high probability of releasing the game ball from the chance exit 2506d. Can be accepted at.

Further, the front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 includes three general winning openings 2301 that can always accept game balls, although details will be described later. Further, the front side unit 2300 is provided with a left shelf portion 2302 for guiding the game ball toward the center on the upper surface of the function display bonnet 2307 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached.

Further, although the details of the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described later, the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side of the center accessory 2500 is attached to a large opening 1158 formed in the substantially center of the game panel 1150. Etc. are formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. The center accessory 2500 enters the peripheral wall portion 2502 that prevents the game ball from entering the frame, the warp entrance 2503 that opens at a predetermined position on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 2502, and the warp entrance 2503. The warp passage 2504 through which the game balls are distributed, the warp outlet 2505 capable of discharging the game balls distributed through the warp passage 2504, and the game area 1100 after rolling the game balls released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction. A stage 2506 that discharges to and returns to the warp inlet 2503, and a distribution member 2520 that distributes the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 to either the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side that discharges into the game area 1100. There is.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes an attacker passage 2509a that opens on the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 2502 and allows game balls to flow, and a second major winning opening 2509 that is arranged in the attacker passage 2509a and serves as a variable winning opening. The gate portion 2585a, which is arranged directly below the downstream end of the attacker passage 2509a and can detect the passage of a game ball, and the second starting opening 2587b, which is arranged directly below the gate portion 2585a and serves as a variable winning opening, are provided. The second starting port 2587b of the center accessory 2500 can accept the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a. In addition, the second major winning opening 2509 of the center accessory 2500 can accept the game ball according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. .. In addition, a specific area 2509b as a special prize winning opening is provided in the second large winning opening 2509. The specific area 2509b includes a specific count sensor 2578a attached to the unit base 2571 and capable of detecting a game ball received in the specific area 2509b, and a specific area 2509b attached above the specific count sensor 2578a and moved in the horizontal direction. A movable piece 2578b that can adjust the acceptance of the game ball to the player is arranged. Details of the specific region 2509b will be described later in [2-5] with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and 180.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 132. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed on the right side of the center in the left-right direction at the lower part of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. It is fixed to the front of the. The attacker unit 2100 includes a general winning opening 2101 in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be accepted, and a first large winning opening 2102 arranged below the general winning opening 2101. .. The first large winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long plate-shaped opening / closing member 2104 described later.

As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where the game ball can be received at all times. The first major winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in which the left-right direction of the front view is 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball and the vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball, and faces forward. The opened opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped opening / closing member 2104. In the first large winning opening 2102, the opening / closing member 2104 is rotatable about the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the opening / closing member 2104 is in a substantially vertical state, it becomes impossible to accept the game ball, and the opening / closing member 2104 is omitted. When it is in a horizontal state, it is possible to accept game balls, which is a so-called variable winning opening.

The attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment will be described in more detail. The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the horizontally long plate-shaped base plate 2104a and the base plate 2104a which are in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150 and through which the first large winning opening 2102 penetrates, and also constitutes the general winning opening 2101 to form the base plate 2104a. An attacker base 2104 having a box-shaped receiving portion 2104b that protrudes forward from the front and is open upward and rearward, and a gutter portion 2104c that can guide a game ball from the lower part of the rear end of the receiving portion 2104b to the rear, and an attacker. It is provided with a horizontally long plate-shaped opening / closing member 2104 capable of closing the first large winning opening 2102 opened in the base plate 2104a of the base 2104. The gutter portion 2103c of the attacker base 2103 can deliver the game ball received to the general winning opening 2101 to the ball discharge unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

The opening / closing member 2104 includes a shaft portion 2103a extending outward from the lower portions of both left and right ends, and an action pin 2103b extending diagonally downward and to the right from a position diagonally below the shaft portion 2103a at the right end of the front view. .. The opening / closing member 2104 can open / close the first large winning opening 2102 by rotatably supporting the shaft portion 2103a by the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106, which will be described later.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 has a pair of bearing portions 2105a capable of supporting the shaft portion 2104a of the opening / closing member 2104, and a horizontally long box-shaped accommodating portion 2105b whose front and lower sides are open corresponding to the first prize opening 2102. And the base plate 2104a in the attacker base 2104, which has a passage hole 2105c formed on the rear side of the accommodating portion 2105b and substantially directly below the back portion 2103c of the attacker base 2103 and penetrated in the vertical direction through which the game ball can pass. It includes an upper case 2105 that is mounted on the rear side.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 faces the pair of lower bearing portions 2106a that rotatably support the shaft portion 2104a of the opening / closing member 2104 in cooperation with the upper 2105a of the bearing portion of the upper case 2105, and the upper 2105b of the accommodating portion of the upper case 2105. A horizontally long box-shaped lower part 2106b with the front and upper sides open, and a lower part 2106c through the upper case 2105 that communicates with the upper case 2105 and penetrates in the vertical direction through which the game ball can pass. It also has a through hole 2106d that penetrates the bottom wall of the housing portion lower 2106b in the vertical direction and allows the game ball to pass through at a position on the left side of the passage hole lower 2106c in the front view, and is combined with the upper case 2105 from the lower side and is an attacker. It includes a lower case 2106 that is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2104a in the base 2104. The lower case 2106 is inclined so that the bottom wall of the lower 2106b of the housing portion is lowered toward the through hole 2106d.

By combining the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, the shaft portion 2104a of the opening / closing member 2104 can be rotatably supported by the bearing portion upper 2105a and the bearing portion lower 2106a, and the opening / closing member 2104 can be supported. By rotating it, the first prize opening 2102 can be opened and closed. Further, the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106, the upper 2105b of the accommodating portion and the lower 2106b of the accommodating portion, can form a space capable of accommodating the game ball on the rear side of the first large winning opening 2102, and penetrate the accommodated game ball. It can be discharged downward through the hole 2106d. The upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 are made of a translucent material.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger 2107a that is sandwiched between the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 and can advance and retreat in the left-right direction, and opens and closes by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2107 and the plunger 2107a of the first attacker solenoid 2107. It includes a link member 2108 that rotates the member 2104. The first attacker solenoid 2107 is arranged on the right side of the front view of 2105c above the passage hole and 2106c below the passage hole so that the plunger 2107a advances and retreats from the right end.

Further, the link member 2108 is arranged near the tip of the plunger 2107a in which the first attacker unit 2107 advances and retreats, and is rotatably supported by the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The engaged portion 2108b and the engaged portion 2108b which are arranged at positions eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 2108a and which rotate integrally with the rotating shaft 2108a and engage with the tip of the plunger 2107a. It is provided at a position different from that of the rotation shaft 2108a and at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotation shaft 2108a, and is provided with a pair of operating pins 2108c that rotate integrally with the rotation shaft 2108a and are separated in the circumferential direction. The pair of actuating pins 2108c of the link member 2108 extends forward, and in the state where the attacker unit 2100 is assembled, the actuating pin 2104b of the opening / closing member 2104 is located between the pair of actuating pins 2108c.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the lower surface of the lower case 2106, receives a game ball that has passed through the through hole 2106d, and then discharges the passage member 2109 below the through hole 2106d, and the upper case 2105. A spare sensor 2110 that is mounted directly above the passing hole 2105c on the upper surface and can detect the game ball, and a first count that is mounted in the through hole 2106d of the lower case 2106 and detects the game ball received in the first prize opening 2102. It is equipped with a sensor 2111.

In this embodiment, the game ball is not supplied to the spare sensor 2110 of the attacker unit 2100.

Further, it is attached to the rear surface of the base plate 2103a of the attacker base 2103 so as to straddle the rear sides of the attacker unit 2100, the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106, and is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2112 having transparency and the rear surface of the substrate cover 2112. The first large winning opening decorative board 2113 with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, the first attacker solenoid 2107, the spare sensor 2110, and the first count sensor 2111 and the panel relay board 3020 mounted on the upper surface of the upper case 2105. It is provided with an attacker unit relay terminal plate 2114 that relays the connection of the above. The first grand prize opening decorative board 2113 is connected to the lamp drive board 3021 of the back unit 3000.

In the normal state of the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the plunger 2107a of the first attacker solenoid 2107 is in an extended state. In this state, the action pin 2104b of the opening / closing member 2104 is pushed downward by one of the working pins 2108c of the link member 2108, and the plate-shaped opening / closing member 2104 is in an upright state to open the first prize opening 2102. It is in a closed state.

When the first attacker solenoid 2107 is energized by a big hit game or the like from this normal state, the plunger 2107a moves to the left in the front view and becomes an immersive state. When the plunger 2107a moves to the left in the front view, the engaged portion 2108b of the link member 2108 engaged with the tip of the plunger 2107a causes the link member 2108 to move from the front view clock around the axis of the rotation shaft 2108a. It will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the link member 2108 rotates in the front clockwise direction, the pair of actuating pins 2108c of the link member 2108 revolves in the ascending direction, and the actuating pin 2104b of the opening / closing member 2104 rises as the actuating pin 2108c rises. It will rotate around the shaft portion 2104a in the direction. As a result, the opening / closing member 2104 rotates about the shaft portion 2104a so that its upper side moves forward, and the game ball can be accepted into the first large winning opening 2102.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 can illuminate the first special winning opening 2102 together with the translucent opening / closing member 2104 by emitting the LED provided on the first large winning opening decorative substrate 2113.

[2-3. Starting port unit]
Subsequently, the start port unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the start port unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the start port unit 2200 of this example is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and directly above the out port 1151. It has a mouth 2201.

As shown in the figure, the start port unit 2200 of this example has a plate-shaped start port base 2202 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a first start on the front surface of the start port base 2202 and bulges forward. A start port bonnet 2203 in which the port 2201 is arranged, a translucent lens member 2204 attached to the rear side of the start port base 2202, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the rear side of the lens member 2204 and mounted on the front surface. The first starting port decorative board 2205, the tubular reflector 2206 arranged between the first starting port decorative board 2205 and the starting port bonnet 2203 and extending in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the first starting port decorative board 2205. A substrate cover 2207 that covers the lens member 2204 and is attached to the rear side of the lens member 2204.

The start port base 2202 of the start port unit 2200 is formed with a shallow relief-like decoration on the front surface and a plating layer having a metallic luster. Further, the starting port base 2202 has an insertion hole 2202a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a substantially central position and allows the reflector 2206 to pass through, and a lens member 2204 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position outside the front view of the starting port bonnet 2203. It has a plurality of openings 2202b.

Further, the starting port bonnet 2203 of the starting port unit 2200 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open, and a predetermined decoration is provided on the front surface. Further, the starting port bonnet 2203 is provided with a box-shaped receiving portion 2203a which forms the first starting port 2201 and is opened upward and rearward at the upper portion. The starting port bonnet 2203 is entirely made of a translucent material, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on a portion of the front surface excluding the substantially central portion below the receiving portion 2203a. There is.

The lens member 2204 of the starting port unit 2200 has a gutter portion 2204a formed at the upper end and guides the game ball received by the first starting opening 2201 to the rear, and an insertion hole 2202a of the starting opening base 2202 below the gutter portion 2204a. It is provided with an insertion hole 2204b that penetrates in the front-rear direction and allows the reflector 2206 to pass through so as to substantially coincide with the above, and a decorative portion 2204c that bulges forward and faces the player side from the opening 2202b of the starting port base 2202. The lens member 2204 can guide the light from the LED provided near the outer periphery of the first starting port decorative substrate 2205 to illuminate the side surface of the opening 2202b of the starting port base 2202 and the starting port bonnet 2203.

The reflector 2206 of the starting port unit 2200 is made of a material having low translucency and is attached to the rear surface of the lens member 2204. The reflector 2206 can prevent the light from the LED provided near the center of the first starting port decorative substrate 2205 from leaking to the outside, and is provided near the outer periphery of the first starting port decorative substrate 2205. It is possible to prevent the light from the LED from leaking inward, and it is possible to illuminate and decorate only the center of the front surface of the starting port bonnet 2203.

When the game ball is received by the receiving portion 2203a of the starting port bonnet 2203 forming the first starting port 2201, the starting port unit 2200 of the present embodiment uses the gutter portion 2204a of the lens member 2204 on the rear side from the starting port bonnet 2203. It can be delivered to the ball discharge unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

[2-4. Front side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The front side unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the game area 1100 in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150 and below the center in the vertical direction, and is located on the inner circumference of the game area 1100. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface of the inner rail 1112 when viewed from the front). The front side unit 2300 has an outer shape in front view formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100.

The front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment is front of the three general winning openings 2301 and the three general winning openings 2301, which are arranged in an arc along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 so that the game balls can be received at all times. The right side is arranged across the left shelf 2302 where the game ball, which is arranged on the left side and the upper side of the view and is inclined so that the right side is lowered, and the two general winning openings 2301 near the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. It is provided with a right shelf portion 2303 on which a game ball inclined so as to be lowered can roll.

Further, the front side unit 2300 is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 and is arranged in the rear side of the front side base 2304 which is formed in an arc shape and has three general winning openings 2301 and the front side base 2304. The front side decorative board 2305 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, the board cover 2306 that covers the rear side of the front side decorative board 2305 and is attached to the rear side of the front side base 2304, and the front surface of the uppermost general winning opening 2301. It is provided with a shallow box-shaped function display bonnet 2307 that is attached to the front surface of the front side base 2304 on the left side and the upper side of the view and is open at the rear. In the front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment, the function display board 1191 is attached to the rear side of the function display bonnet 2307.

The front side bases 2304 of the front side unit 2300 project forward, respectively, and are arranged slightly below the substantially center in the vertical direction to form one general winning opening 2301 and below the upper receiving portion 2304a and the upper receiving portion 2304a. The lower receiving portion 2304b, which is arranged on the side and forms two general winning openings 2301, and the upper receiving portion 2304a and the lower receiving portion 2304b extend rearward from the rear side, respectively, and the game ball received in each general winning opening 2301 is rearward. It is equipped with a gutter part 2304c that guides to. The upper receiving portion 2304a is formed so that one general winning opening 2301 opens upward. The lower receiving portion 2304c is formed so that the general winning opening 2301 on the side closer to the upper receiving portion 2304a opens diagonally to the upper left in the front view, and the general winning opening 2301 on the side far from the upper receiving portion 2304a is formed. It is formed so as to open to the right. Further, the upper surface of the lower receiving portion 2304c is inclined so that the right side is lowered, and the right shelf portion 2303 capable of guiding the game ball is used.

Further, the front side base 2304 is provided with a fan-shaped frame-shaped bonnet mounting portion 2304d for mounting the function display bonnet 2307 on the left side of the upper receiving portion 2304a in the front view. The front side base 2304 is provided with a predetermined translucent decoration on the front surface excluding the bonnet mounting portion 2304d.

The function display bonnet 2307 of the front side unit 2300 is formed in a fan shape having an arc along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in the front view, and the upper surface inclined so that the right side is lowered is the left shelf portion 2302. Has been done. Further, the function display bonnet 2307 is provided with a plurality of openings 2307a corresponding to a plurality of LEDs mounted on the function display board 1191 on the front surface. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display bonnet 2307 extends rearward so as to surround each opening 2307a, and the light from the LED of the function display board 1191 corresponding to one opening 2307a is another. It is provided with a reflector piece that prevents leakage to the opening 2307a. In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1180 is composed of the function display board 1191 and the function display bonnet 2307.

In the front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment, the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, specifically, the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2508 and flowing down is to the right by the left shelf portion 2302 and the right shelf portion 2303. It is possible to guide in the direction (center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction). Further, the front side unit 2300 sends the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2301 of the front side unit 2300 to the rear side of the game panel 1150 by the respective gutters 2304c, and the balls of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3400.

[2-5. Center role]
Subsequently, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 148. FIG. 131 is a front view of the center accessory of the front unit, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the distribution member of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the distribution member of the center accessory as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 138 is a front sectional view showing the left route in the center accessory together with a part of the warp passage. Further, FIG. 139 is a perspective view showing a lower warp passage member and a stage member in the center accessory. Further, FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there.

Further, FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the second starting port unit of the center accessory as viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a perspective view of the second starting port unit of the center accessory as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory second starting port unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory second starting port unit disassembled and viewed afterwards. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 146 (a) is a front sectional view showing a right route in the center accessory, and FIG. 146 (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). Further, FIG. 147 (a) is an enlarged front sectional view showing a main part of the right route when the second starting port of the center accessory is in the open state, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front sectional view showing an enlarged view of the main part of the right route, and FIG. It is a side sectional view cut at the site of. Further, FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (b) are front sectional views showing an enlarged main part of the right route when the second major winning opening in the center accessory is in the open state. FIG. 148 (a) shows a case where the game ball cannot enter the specific area 2509b, and FIG. 148 (b) shows a case where the game ball enters the specific area 2509b.

The center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that widely penetrates substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The game area 1100 can be divided into upper and lower parts by attaching to. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the center accessory 2500 includes a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side to the rear side, and the entire window portion 2501 is formed in a frame shape.

The center accessory 2500 has a peripheral wall portion 2502 that bulges forward from the game panel 1150 and can prevent the game ball from entering the window portion 2501 while being attached to the game panel 1150, and the front surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502. A warp entrance 2503 that opens on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the view and allows game balls to enter, a warp passage 2504 that allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2503 to flow, and a peripheral wall that allows the game balls that have flowed through the warp passage 2504 to be released. Only the warp outlet 2505 opened on the inner peripheral surface (inside the window 2501) of the 2502 and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 are supplied, and the game ball placed at the lower part inside the window 2501 and supplied is provided. It is provided with a stage 2506, which is recirculated and released into the game area 1100 after being rolled.

The stage 2506 of the center accessory 2500 has a first stage 2506a in which a warp outlet 2505 is arranged at the left end of the front view and extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction so that a game ball can be released forward, and a front side of the first stage 2506a. Corresponding to the second stage 2506b, which is arranged on the lower side and extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction so that the game ball can be discharged into the front game area 1100, and directly above the first starting port 2201 of the first stage 2506a. A chance entrance 2506c that opens at the desired position and allows a game ball to enter, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2506c are discharged into the game area 1100, and are directly above the first start port 2201 on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2506b. It is equipped with a chance exit 2506d that opens at a corresponding position.

The first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b of the stage 2506 have a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the positions corresponding to directly above the first starting port 2201, that is, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150. In this state, the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is formed in a wavy shape so as to be slightly higher than both the left and right sides. Further, the lowest portion of the first stage 2506a is formed so as to be outside in the left-right direction from the lowest portion of the second stage 2506b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the stage 2506 includes a plurality of guide portions 2506e arranged at predetermined positions of the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b and inclined so as to be lowered toward the front, and the first stage 2506a. The second stage 2506b is provided with a bank portion 2506f which is arranged at the front end excluding the portion where the guide portion 2506e is arranged and protrudes upward. The guide portion 2506e of the stage 2506 is provided at the lowest position of the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b and at a position corresponding to directly above the first starting port 2201 of the second stage 2506b, respectively.

In the center accessory 2500, the upper outer peripheral shape of the peripheral wall portion 2502 extends from the position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view to the right side in the game area 1100 until the position corresponding to the abutting portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. It is formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference, and on the left side of the arc-shaped part, it is formed in a shape that is recessed downward by a predetermined distance and then inclined so as to be lowered toward the left. .. As a result, the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 through between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 of the front component 1110A is a left route passing through the left side of the front view of the window part 2501 by the peripheral wall part 2502. Either 1100L or the right route 1100R passing through the right side of the front view of the window 2501 is distributed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 2500 has a part of both left and right ends extending to the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and is near the inner circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side of the front view of the warp entrance 2503 and on the downstream side. The entrance 2507 that opens in, the discharge port 2508 that discharges the game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 into the game area 1100 and opens at a position below the distribution member 2520, which will be described later, and the right side of the window 2501 when viewed from the front. The game ball is guided from the right end of the arcuate portion along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 to the upstream side of the attacker unit 2100, and the second large winning opening 2509 (FIG. 146, etc.) is placed in the passage. It is provided with an attacker passage 2509a in which (see) is arranged. As a result, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is distributed in the center accessory 2500 regardless of whether the left route 1100L or the right route 1100R is distributed.

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the center accessory 2500 has a frame shape that is attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, includes a part of the peripheral wall portion 2502, and forms the rear wall of the warp passage 2504. The center base 2510, the distribution member 2520 installed in the warp passage 2504 on the front surface of the center base 2510, the left passage cover 2530 that covers the front side of the distribution member 2520 and forms the front wall of the warp passage 2504, and the distribution member. A left aisle rear cover 2540 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 at a position behind the 2520 and capable of guiding the game ball, and a warp aisle 2504 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 on the downstream side of the distribution member 2520. It includes a lower warp passage member 2550 which constitutes a part and has a warp outlet 2505, and a stage member 2560 which is attached to the rear side of the lower side of the center base 2510 and has a stage 2506.

Further, the center accessory 2500 has a second attacker unit 2570 attached to the rear side of the right side of the center base 2510 and a second starter arranged below the second attacker unit 2570 and attached to the lower end of the right side of the center base 2510. The mouth unit 2580, the right passage cover 2600 which is attached to the front side of the right side of the center base 2510 and can cover a part of the second attacker unit 2570, and the center base which is arranged below the right passage cover 2600. 2605 under the right passage cover which is attached to the front surface of 2510 and can cover a part of each of the second attacker unit 2570 and the second start port unit 2580, and 2605 which is attached to the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 and emits light toward the front. It includes a center right light emitting unit 2610 capable of irradiating, and a branch sensor 2620 attached to the center base 2510 from the rear side.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 on the upper side of the distribution member 2520 and extends in the front-rear direction, and extends to the outer periphery of the reflector 2630 and is located on the rear side of the center base 2510. The center left decorative board 2632, which is arranged and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, the center left board cover 2634 that covers the rear side of the center left decorative board 2632 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510, the center base 2510 and the reflector 2630. It is equipped with a magnetic detection sensor 2636 that is sandwiched between the two and can detect magnetism. The center left decorative substrate 2632 and the center left substrate cover 2634 are formed with holes through which the rear end of the reflector 2630 can be inserted.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the second attacker unit 2570 when viewed from the front, and can be light-emitting decorated. A transparent plate-shaped protective cover 2650 that is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and prevents the game ball from entering the rear side through the window 2501 and irradiates light toward the left side surface of the protective cover 2650 when viewed from the front. A board cover that holds the rear end of the protective cover left decorative board 2652 and the protective cover left decorative board 2652 that are mounted with a plurality of possible LEDs and extend in a plate shape in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction, and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510. 2654 and.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a center-top effect unit 2660 which is attached to the upper part of the frame on the front side of the center base 2510, is decorated with a logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and moves according to the gaming state. ..

Next, each member constituting the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. In the center base 2510 of the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2502 that bulges forward from the game panel 1150 is arranged substantially on the entire circumference except for the portion where the stage member 2560 on the lower side is attached. Further, in the center base 2510, the lower side to which the stage member 2560 is attached is formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the chance outlet 2506d opens at a position corresponding to directly above the first starting port 2201. There is.

The center base 2510 of the present embodiment forms a rear wall of the passage from the warp entrance 2503 to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504, and extends in the vertical direction along the left end of the front view of the window portion 2501 and is recessed rearward. The recess 2510a, the plate-shaped left extending portion 2510b extending from the left end of the passage recess 2510a to the left, the left extending portion 2510b, and the passage recess 2510a are formed underneath, and are horizontally elongated and recessed rearward and inside. The distribution space recess 2510c to which the distribution member 2520 is attached, the right opening 2510d which opens downward to the bottom of the right end of the front view in the distribution space recess 2510c and allows the game ball to pass through, and the distribution larger than the right opening 2510d. It is provided with a left opening 2510e that opens rearward at a position on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the space recess 2510c.

Further, the center base 2510 extends forward from the upper end of the left extending portion 2510b in a plate shape and is inclined so that the left end is lowered, and the shelf portion 2510f is below the left end and above the distribution space recess 2510c. A passage port 2510 g through which the game ball can pass through the left extension portion 2510 b in the front-rear direction at the position of It is provided with a passage hole 2510i that penetrates in the front-rear direction and allows the reflector 2630 to pass through at a position below the shelf portion 2510f in the left extension portion 2510b.

Further, the center base 2510 includes a plate-shaped passage wall 2510j that forms a part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 on the right side of the front view of the window portion 2501 and forms an attacker passage 2509a through which game balls can flow and extends forward. ing. As shown in detail in FIG. 146 and the like, the center base 2510 guides the game ball that has flowed down to the right in the front view along the upper arc-shaped portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502, and is formed into a crank shape by the passage wall 2510j. The formed branch approach passage 2510k communicates with the lower end of the branch approach passage 2510k, and the branch sensor 2620 is arranged directly below the lower end of the branch approach passage 2510k, and the branch space 2510l having a predetermined size formed by the passage wall 2510j and the branch. It communicates with the lower right corner of the space 2510l and with the connecting passage 2510m formed by the passage wall 2510j and extending downward in a substantially arc shape, and with the lower end of the connecting passage 2510m and with the lower end communicating with the inside of the game area 1100. The second large winning opening 2509 is arranged and has a second attacker space 2510n having a predetermined size formed by the passage wall 2510j.

Further, the center base 2510 communicates with the upper part of the second attacker space 2510n, and the lower end of the center base 2510 communicates with the inside of the game area 1100 through the left side of the front view of the second attacker space 2510n. A guide portion 2510p that forms a part of the inner wall of the possible bypass passage 2510o and the second attacker space 2510n and guides the game ball that is inclined so as to be lower toward the second prize opening 2509 and that has passed through the connecting passage 2510m. The right end of the front view forms the upper end of the second prize opening 2509, the left end forms the entrance end of the bypass passage 2510o, and the inclined portion 2510q is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the inclined portion 2510q is below. It is provided with an insertion hole 2510r that penetrates in the front-rear direction and a part of the second attacker unit 2570 is inserted from the rear side. The guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is formed so that an extension line of the inclined surface passes through the second prize opening 2509.

Further, the center base 2510 is a plate-shaped extension extending outward along the front surface of the game panel 1150 from the rear end of the portion recessed downward from the center in the left-right direction in the front view on the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502. A center having a protrusion 2511, a plurality of protrusions 2512 protruding forward from the upper extension 2511 (three in this example), and a center arranged behind the upper extension 2511 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It includes an upper left decorative substrate 2513 and a substrate cover 2514 that covers the rear side of the center upper left decorative substrate 2513 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510.

The distribution member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is mounted in the distribution space recess 2510c of the center base 2510, and the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 is placed on either the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side. It is to sort. As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the distribution member 2520 is curved so as to extend in the left-right direction and lower the center in the left-right direction, and the rolling surface 2521 and the rolling surface 2521 on which the game ball can roll. The fan-shaped discharge part 2522, which is arranged at the lowest part of the discharge part and spreads rearward in the left-right direction and becomes lower, and the ridge part 2523, which is arranged on the rear side and the lower side of the discharge part 2522 and extends in the front-rear direction. A guide surface 2524 capable of guiding a game ball diagonally downward from both the left and right sides of the ridge 2523, and a protrusion 2525 protruding upward from a portion excluding the discharge portion 2522 at the rear end of the rolling surface 2521. , Is equipped.

The rolling surface 2521 extending in the left-right direction of the distribution member 2520 is formed so that the position to the right from the center in the left-right direction in the front view is the lowest. Further, the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 is formed so that the right side of the front view has a larger inclination angle from the horizontal than the left side with respect to the lowest portion.

The left passage cover 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the front side of the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510, forms the upper front side of the warp inlet 2503 and the warp passage 2504, and has the upper warp passage cover 2531 and the upper part. A guide passage cover 2532 having translucency that guides a game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 and the entrance 2507 to the guide piece 2510h of the center base 2510, which is arranged apart from the warp passage cover 2531 to the left when viewed from the front. A transparent plate-shaped distribution space cover 2533 that is arranged below the guide passage cover 2532 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 and closes the front side of the distribution space recess 2510c of the center base 2510, and above the distribution space cover 2533 and It is provided between the upper warp passage cover 2531 and the guide passage cover 2532, and has a hemispherical and translucent center left decorative body 2534 that bulges forward.

The upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530 is formed in a box shape extending in the vertical direction while the upper side, the lower side, and the rear side are opened, and by cooperating with the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510, The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2503 can flow down in a zigzag shape in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide passage cover 2532 is formed in a box shape extending in the vertical direction while the upper side, the lower side, and the rear side are opened, and the rear side is closed by the left extending portion 2510b of the center base 2510. A guide passage 2532a for guiding the game ball can be formed.

Further, in the center left decorative body 2534 of the left passage cover 2530, the front side of the transparent hemisphere is formed on a smooth surface, and the rear surface side is formed on multiple surfaces by a plurality of triangular surfaces having different sizes and shapes. .. As a result, the plate thickness of the hemispherical portion becomes non-uniform, a lens is formed for each triangular portion, and the transmitted light can be diffusely refracted. Further, the center left decorative body 2534 has a relief-like decoration having a metallic luster on the outer periphery of the front surface of a hemisphere. The center left decorative body 2534 is arranged in front of the passage hole 2510i of the center base 2510, and is movable on the back left side of the back left effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side through the inside of the reflector 2630. Light from the decorative unit 3610 can be used for light emission decoration.

The left passage rear cover 2540 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and can cover the left opening 2510e and the rear side of the passage port 2510g in the center base 2510. The left passage cover 2540 is guided by the guide piece 2510h of the center base 2510 to pass through the passage port 2510 g and guide the game ball to the rear side of the center base 2510. It is provided with a guide wall 2541 that guides the game ball to a height of substantially the lower side of 2510e, and a release slope 2542 that guides the game ball guided by the guide wall 2541 forward and is gently inclined.

The release slope 2542 of the left passage rear cover 2540 extends from the rear side to the lower side of the left opening 2510e in the center base 2510, and the game ball guided to the release slope 2542 by the guide wall 2541 has an inclination of the release slope 2542. It rolls forward and is discharged from the discharge port 2508 into the game area 1100 through the left opening 2510e.

The lower warp passage member 2550 of the center accessory 2500 has a translucent property and is formed in a rectangular cylinder shape extending in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIG. 139, an opening 2551 through which a game ball can pass is formed in the upper part. Along with being formed, a warp outlet 2505 opens at the lower part of the right side surface in front view. The opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 coincides with the right opening 2510d of the center base 2510 in the assembled state, and a game ball passing through the right opening 2510d can circulate in the lower warp passage member 2550.

The stage member 256 of the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent stage main body 2561 provided with the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b, a transparent stage back cover 2562 covering the rear side and the lower side of the stage main body 2561, and the back of the stage. It is provided with a stage decorative board 2563 which is arranged between the cover 2562 and the stage main body 2561 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The stage body 2561 of the stage member 2560 includes a rear wall portion 2561a extending upward in a plate shape from the rear end excluding the chance entrance 2506c in the first stage 2506a. It is possible to prevent the game ball supplied to the stage 2506 from falling off to the rear side of the stage 2506 by the rear wall portion 2561a of the stage main body 2561. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the stage body 2561 has a cross section on the back side of the first stage 2506a, the second stage 2506b, and the portion extending in the vertical direction between the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b. It has a semicircular shape and includes a plurality of lens portions 2561b extending in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction. The lens portion 2561b makes it difficult to see the lower side of the stage 2506, and the light from the LED of the stage decorative substrate 2563 can illuminate and decorate the entire stage 2506.

Further, the stage back cover 2562 of the stage member 2560 includes a chance passage 2562a that connects the chance entrance 2506c and the chance exit 2506d, and a return portion 2562b that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rear wall portion 2561a of the stage body 2561. There is. Further, the stage decorative substrate 2563 of the stage member 2560 is arranged behind the stage 2506 and below the first stage 2506a, although detailed illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, the second attacker unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500 extends in the front-rear direction to a predetermined position of the unit base 2571 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and the lower front portion of the unit base 2571. A second opening / closing member 257 that is rotatably supported around the shaft, a transparent plate-shaped front cover 2573 that is arranged on the front side of the second opening / closing member 2572 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2571, and a unit base 2571. The second attacker solenoid 2574 which is arranged on the rear side and has a plunger 2574a which can move forward and backward, and the second attacker solenoid 2574 which is attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a and transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger 2574a to rotate the second opening / closing member 2572 It is provided with a link member 2575.

The second attacker unit 2570 includes a solenoid base 2576 that accommodates and supports the second attacker solenoid 2574 from the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2571, and a front surface of the second attacker solenoid 2574 that is attached to the front side of the solenoid base 2576. The solenoid cover 2577 that covers the unit base, the second count sensor 2578 that is attached to the unit base 2571 from the rear side and can detect the game ball received in the second prize opening 2509, and the unit base that is detected by the second count sensor 2578. It is provided with a passage cover 2579 that guides the game ball guided to the rear side of the 2571 downward and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2571.

The unit base 2571 of the second attacker unit 2570 is formed in a crescent shape with a wide lower end and a shallow box shape with an open rear side. The unit base 2571 has a plate-shaped insertion surface 2571a that slightly protrudes forward from the front surface of the lower portion and whose outer shape corresponds to the insertion hole 2510r of the center base 2510, and a second opening / closing that penetrates in the front-rear direction at substantially the center of the insertion surface 2571a. A shaft hole 2571b that rotatably supports the member 2572, an opening 2571c through which an arc-shaped penetrating along the outer periphery of the shaft hole 2571b and an action pin 257c of the second opening / closing member 2527 described later are inserted, and a shaft hole 2571b. At the position on the left side of the front view, it penetrates in the front-back direction in a rectangular shape and protrudes forward from the outer circumference excluding the upper side of the passage port 2571d and the passage port 2571d through which the game ball received in the second big winning opening 2509 can pass. The receiving portion 2571e, the guiding portion 2571f extending outward from the left and right upper ends of the receiving portion 2571e and inclined so as to be lowered toward the inside of the receiving portion 2571e, and the receiving portion 2571e facing each other below the guiding portion 2571f. It is provided with a sensor holding portion 2571g formed on the left and right side surfaces thereof to hold the second count sensor 2578, and a triangular guide piece 2571h extending upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2571e and inclined so as to decrease toward the rear. There is.

Further, the unit base 2571 is formed in the lower right protruding portion 2571i protruding forward from the lower right position in the front view of the shaft hole 2571b, the lower right protruding portion 2571i, and the guiding portion 2571f on the right side in the front view, respectively, and the second opening / closing member. It is provided with a pair of stopper portions 2571j that regulate the rotation range of 2572, and plate-shaped ribs 2571k extending from the lower end of the lower right protruding portion 2571i to substantially the center and the lower end of the right side surface of the receiving portion 2571e. .. The front ends of the lower right protruding portion 2571i, the stopper portion 2571j, and the rib 2571k project forward to the same position as the front end of the receiving portion 2571e. A front cover 2573 is attached so as to cover the front side of the receiving portion 2571e, the guiding portion 2571f, the lower right protruding portion 2571i, and the rib 2571k.

Further, the unit base 2571 is provided with a ball passage 2571l that extends rearward from the rear surface and is opened rearward to guide the game ball that has passed through the passage port 2571d to the right in the front view. A passage cover 2579 is attached to the rear end of the ball passage 2571l so that an opening through which a game ball can pass is formed at the right end of the rear end when viewed from the front.

When the second attacker unit 2570 is attached to the center base 2510, the insertion surface 2571a of the unit base 2571 projects forward so that the front surface thereof substantially coincides with the rear surface of the second attacker space 2510n in the front-rear direction. Further, the right end of the guide portion 2571f on the right side of the front view of the unit base 2571 forms the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509. Further, the stopper portions 2571j formed on the right guide portion 2571f and the lower right protrusion portion 2571i are arranged so as to face each other along an arc centered on the shaft core of the shaft hole 2571b, and the shaft hole is also formed. They are arranged at an angle of about 90 degrees around the axis of 2571b. The rotation range of the second opening / closing member 2572 can be regulated by abutting the stopper piece 2572c of the second opening / closing member 2571 on the pair of stopper portions 2571j, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is set to the open position and the closed position. Can be positioned to.

The second opening / closing member 2527 of the second attacker unit 2570 is formed in a drip-shaped blade portion 2572a for opening / closing the second prize opening 2509 and a shaft hole 2571b of the unit base 2571 extending rearward from the base end of the blade portion 2572a. The shaft portion 2572b to be inserted and supported, the action pin 257c extending from the rear side to the rear side of the blade portion 257a at an eccentric position with the shaft portion 257b, and the tip of the blade portion 257a from the base portion of the blade portion 2572a are shafts. It is provided with a stopper piece 2572d extending to the opposite side with the portion 257b in between.

The second opening / closing member 2527 rotates by inserting the shaft portion 257b into the shaft hole 2572b of the unit base 2571 from the front side of the unit base 2571 so that the action pin 257c penetrates the opening 2571c of the unit base 2571. The stopper piece 257d is positioned between the pair of stopper portions 2571j in the unit base 2571 while being supported so as to be possible, and the stopper piece 257d that rotates with the blade portion 257a abuts on the stopper portion 2571j to form a predetermined angle range. It can only rotate within.

The rear end of the action pin 257c is slidably inserted into the slit 2575c of the link member 2575 in the second opening / closing member 2572. As a result, when the link member 2527 advances and retreats in the left-right direction by the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574, the rear end of the action pin 2572c slides in the slit 2575c of the link member 2575 in the vertical direction, and the second opening / closing member 2572 moves. It rotates around the shaft portion 2572b.

Further, in the second opening / closing member 2572, the stopper piece 2572d is located between the pair of stopper portions 2571j in the unit base 2571 in the assembled state, and the blade portion 2572a rises substantially vertically to open the second large winning opening 2509. When the closed state is set, the stopper piece 257d abuts on the stopper portion 2571j of the lower right protruding portion 2571i, and when the tip of the blade portion 2572a moves to the right in the front view and the second large winning opening 2509 is opened, the stopper piece When the 2572d comes into contact with the lower stopper portion 2571j of the right guiding portion 2571f, the rotation range of the second opening / closing member 2572 is restricted.

The second attacker solenoid 2574 of the second attacker unit 2570 is arranged so that the plunger 2574a extends to the right in the front view. Further, the link member 2575 of the second attacker unit 2570 extends in a plate shape from the front end of the plunger mounting portion 2575a attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574 and the front end of the plunger mounting portion 2575a to the right in the front view. It is provided with an extension piece 2575b and a slit 2575c that penetrates the extension piece 2575b in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction to slidably insert the action pin 257c of the second opening / closing member 2527.

The solenoid base 2576 of the second attacker unit 2570 is formed in a box shape with an open front, accommodates the second attacker solenoid 2574, and can slide the link member 2575 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the solenoid cover 2577. Hold on.

When the second attacker unit 2570 of the present embodiment is attached to the center base 2510, the inclined portion 2510q of the center base 2510 and the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571 form a second grand prize opening 2509.

As shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, a specific area 2509b is provided in the second large winning opening 2509, and the game ball is specified by passing (or entering) the specific area 2509b (V zone). The accessory condition device is activated. As shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the specific area 2509b is a sensor that is attached to the unit base 2571 and can pass the game ball received in the specific area 2509b, and is a specific count capable of detecting the passed game ball. A sensor 2578a and a movable piece 2578b that is attached above the specific count sensor 2578a and can adjust the acceptance of the game ball into the specific area 2509b by moving in the horizontal direction are arranged.

The movable piece 2578b is made movable in the horizontal direction by a driving device (not shown), and is normally fixed to a relatively left standby position as shown in FIG. 148 (a). When the movable piece 2578b is in the standby position, the game ball that has entered the second attacker unit 2570 cannot enter the specific area 2509b, that is, the specific count sensor 2578a does not detect the game ball. Further, when the special lottery result indicating the winning in the special lottery is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186, the drive device sets the movable piece 2578b according to the predetermined operation control. Move to the operating position to the right of the fixed position. As shown in FIG. 148 (b), when the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position, the game ball that has entered the second attacker unit 2570 can easily enter the specific area 2509b, that is, the specific count sensor. The mode is easy to detect at 2578b.

Then, when the second opening / closing member 2572 is opened in the big hit game state, the game ball received into the second big winning opening 2509 heads for the specific area 2509b when the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific count sensor 2578a, it is determined that the ball has entered (passed) in the specific area 2509b (V prize). After that, the V-winning game ball is guided backward by the guide piece 2571h, enters the rear ball passage 2571l through the passage port 2571d of the unit base 2571, and is discharged rearward from the right end of the front view of the ball passage 2571l. To. When the game ball wins a V prize, the detection information by the specific count sensor 2578a is input to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3020, and the big hit ends by the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a). The later gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, and the time saving state is also set.

Further, when the second opening / closing member 2572 is opened in the big hit game state, the game ball received into the second big winning opening 2509 enters the specific area 2509b when the movable piece 2578b is in the standby position. It is not possible to do so, and it is guided into the receiving portion 2571e by the guiding portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, detected by the second count sensor 2578, and then guided backward by the guiding piece 2571h. Then, the game ball guided backward by the guide piece 2571h enters the rear ball passage 2571l through the passage port 2571d of the unit base 2571, and is discharged rearward from the right end of the front view of the ball passage 2571l.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the operation control of the second opening / closing member 2572 (in a broad sense, the second major winning opening 2509) and the movable piece 2578b as described above, the possibility of V winning is adjustable. , "Short-time opening of specific area (V short opening)" and "Long-time opening of specific area (V long opening)" are set, and these different opening controls are executed based on the type of jackpot. It has become. The details of each opening control will be described later, but when the V short opening is performed, even if the game ball enters the second attacker unit 2570 at the same time when the second opening / closing member 2572 is opened, the movable piece 2578b Is in a standby state, so we cannot expect a V prize, and in reality, there is an opportunity to win a V prize only at the jackpot where the V long opening is performed.

FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a control example in which it is possible to adjust whether or not V winning is possible. FIGS. 180 (A) to 180 (C) summarize the operating states of each member in a specific round (for example, the 13th round) in which the second prize opening 2509 is opened. FIG. 180 (A) shows the open / closed state of the second winning opening 2509 (opening / closing control of the second opening / closing member 2572) in the V long opening pattern, and FIG. 180 (B) shows the second opening / closing state in the V short opening pattern. The open / closed state of the large winning opening 2509 (opening / closing control of the second opening / closing member 2572) is shown, and FIG. 180 (C) shows the controlled state of the VAT structure (that is, the position of the movable piece 2578b). In FIG. 180C, when the control state of the VAT structure is "OFF", it corresponds to the movable piece 2578b being in the standby position, and when the control state of the VAT structure is "ON", the drive device Corresponds to the movable piece 2578b being moved by the moving position, but the state of moving between the standby position and the moving position is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 180 (A) to 180 (C), the horizontal direction indicates the passage of time, the broken lines t1 to t7 drawn in the vertical direction indicate the change timing of each situation, and the seconds shown above t1 to t7. The number indicates the elapsed time from t1.

In the example of FIG. 180, first, as shown in (A), the second big winning opening 2509 (second opening / closing member 2572) is opened at the start of a specific round during the big hit (t1). , The game ball is ready to be accepted into the second prize opening 2509. After that, as shown in FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (B), the second large winning opening 2509 opened at t1 is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds) to the extent that acceptance of a game ball is almost unthinkable. After being opened over, it is closed (t2). The opening / closing timing in the period of t1 to t2 is the same regardless of the opening pattern (V short opening / V long opening) of any specific region. Even if the game ball enters the second major winning opening 2509 during the period of t1 to t2, the movable piece 2578b is in the standby position as shown in FIG. 180 (C), so that the ball has entered. Will not win a V prize.

Then, in the case of the V short opening shown in FIG. 180 (B), after the second big winning opening 2509 is closed at t2, the second big winning opening 2509 is again opened until the end of the specific round (t6). Since it is not opened, the game ball does not enter the second prize opening 2509 or pass through the V zone (specific area 2509b). Therefore, when such a control of V short opening is included in the big hit game, not only the V prize cannot be expected in the round in which the V short opening is performed, but also the prize associated with the game ball entering the big winning opening. It is not possible to expect the payout of balls, and it will be a round that cannot be counted as a substantial round in which the payout of prize balls is expected. Thus, in the jackpot where the V short opening is controlled, the actual number of rounds is reduced by the number of rounds for which the V short opening is controlled (for example, the specific 2 described later). 16R (actually 15R) jackpot).

On the other hand, in the case of the V long opening shown in FIG. 180 (A), after the second big winning opening 2509 is closed at t2, the specific round ends after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds). Before (t6), the second big winning opening 2509 (second opening / closing member 2572) is opened again (t3), so that the game ball can be accepted into the second big winning opening 2509. Furthermore, the movable piece 2578b is moved to the operating position (VAT structure is ON) at a timing close to the opening of the second prize opening 2509 at t3 (t4), and the game enters the second prize opening 2509. A situation is provided in which the ball can pass through the V zone. Further, this open state is continued for a long time so that the acceptance of the game ball into the V zone can be sufficiently expected, unlike the short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in t1 to t2. For example, in FIG. 180, the second prize opening 2509 is opened for 28.5 seconds (t3 to t5), the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position for 30.0 seconds (t4 to t7), and the open states of each other. By overlapping over 27.5 seconds (t4 to t5), it is possible to easily realize V winning of the game ball within the period of t4 to t5. The second major winning opening 2509 opened at t3 will elapse a predetermined time when the number of game balls entered into the second major winning opening 2509 satisfies a predetermined number (for example, eight) (for example, eight). Although it is closed even before t5), it can be easily estimated that at least one of the predetermined number of game balls that have entered the ball will win the V zone even in such a case.

Further, as described above, when the V long opening (FIG. 180 (A)) or the V short opening (FIG. 180 (B)) is performed, the opening / closing timing of the second prize opening 2509 (second opening / closing member 2572) is set. Although the controls are different, as shown in FIG. 180 (C), the movement timing (OFF / ON timing of the VAT structure) of the movable piece 2578b does not change due to the difference in the opening control of the specific area, and is a fixed movement. I do. The movable piece 2578b moves to the operating position at t4 and then returns to the standby position at t7. Note that t6 in FIG. 180 indicates the end timing of the specific round, but the relationship between the end timing of the specific round and the return timing of the movable piece 2578b is not particularly limited.

The number of game balls received in the second major winning opening 2509 (number of prizes) is the number of game balls detected by the specific count sensor 2578a and entered in the specific area 2509b (V number of prizes). It is regarded as the total number of game balls (V non-winning number) detected by the second count sensor 2578 without entering the specific area 2509b, and a predetermined prize ball is paid out according to the winning number. Therefore, if the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 8) is set as the opening condition of the second major winning opening 2509 with the opening of the specified time, the total number of V winning numbers and V non-winning numbers is used. A comparison is made with the maximum number of balls that can be entered. Further, the method of arranging the sensor for detecting the number of winnings in the second large winning opening 2509 is not particularly limited, and for example, as shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the number of V winnings detected by the specific count sensor 2578a The number of V non-winnings detected by the second count sensor 2578 may be detected by a separate sensor and the number of detections may be totaled, or separately from the specific count sensor 2578a, the second major winning opening 2509 may be used. A sensor may be provided to detect the total number of winning prizes. In this case, the position where the game ball that has passed the specific count sensor 2578a can be detected, or the game ball that has been accepted by the second prize opening 2509 can be detected regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed the specific count sensor 2578a. The second count sensor 2578 may be arranged at such a position. In the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, with respect to the payout of prize balls for the game balls accepted into the second major winning opening 2509, the total number of winning balls is counted by the second count sensor 2578 and the payout is made. Explain that it is done.

Further, in the normal state, the second attacker unit 2570 is in a state in which the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574 is advanced to the right side in the front view by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the link member 2575 is advanced by the advance of the plunger 2574a. The blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2527 is in a state of standing up substantially vertically. As a result, the second prize opening 2509 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2572. On the other hand, when the second attacker solenoid 2574 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 2574a retracts into the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the second opening / closing member 2572 rotates in the front view clockwise direction via the link member 2575. To do. As a result, the second prize opening 2509 is opened.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the second start port unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 under the second attacker unit 2570 and penetrates substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. A unit base plate 2581 having an opening 2581a extending in the vertical direction, an inverted triangular lower right front cover 2582 attached to the front on the left side from the substantially center of the front view of the unit base plate 2581, and a lower right front cover 2582. A normal symbol display board 1191a arranged on the rear side and having a normal symbol display 1189 composed of LEDs mounted on the front side, and a board that holds the normal symbol display board 1191a from the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the lower right front cover 2582. It includes a holder 2583 and a guide member 2584 attached to the lower part of the opening 2581a on the front surface of the unit base plate 2581 on the left side of the lower right front cover 2582 when viewed from the front.

Further, the second starting port unit 2580 is a gate member which is attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581 and has a gate portion 2585a and a barrier portion 2585b which project forward through the opening 2581a of the unit base plate 2581 and are arranged vertically. The 2585, the gate sensor 2586 attached to the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 and detecting the passage of the game ball, and the game ball attached to the rear side of the gate member 2585 and passed through the gate portion 2582a and guided to the rear are forward. It has a guide passage 2587a for guiding to, a second start opening 2587b opened below the guide passage 2587a, and a discharge passage 2587c through which game balls passing through the second start 2587b are distributed, and the right side of the front view is opened. It includes a box-shaped passage member 2587 and a plate-shaped passage lid 2588 attached to the right end of the passage member 2587 when viewed from the front and attached to the rear side of the gate member 2585.

Further, the second starting port unit 2580 is attached to the door member 2589 which is rotatably supported by the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 to open and close the second starting port 2587b, and to the rear side of the guide passage 2587a in the passage member 2587. A start port solenoid 2590 having a plunger 2590a capable of advancing and retreating in the vertical direction, a first link member 2591 that moves in the vertical direction as the plunger 2590a of the start port solenoid 2590 advances and retreats, and a vertical direction of the first link member 2591. The second link member 2592 that transmits the movement of the door member 2589 to rotate the door member 2589, and the second link member 2592 that is supported behind the second starting port 2587b of the passage member 2587 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second starting port 2587b. It includes a start port sensor 2593 and a link cover 2594 attached to the right side of the passage lid 2588 when viewed from the front and covering the second link member 2592.

Further, the second starting port unit 2580 is rearward of the second starting port decorative board 2595, which is arranged behind the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the second starting port decorative board 2595. The first board cover 2596 that covers the side and is attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581, and the inverted L-shaped lower right decorative board 2597 that is arranged on the rear side of the unit base plate 2581 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface. The reflector 2598 arranged between the lower right decorative board 2597 and the unit base plate 2581, and the second board cover 2599 that covers the rear side of the lower right decorative board 2597 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581. And have.

The unit base plate 2581 of the second starting port unit 2580 is formed of a translucent material, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower right front cover 2582 on the right side of the front view of the opening 2581a. It has a mouth 2581b. Further, the unit base plate 2581 is decorated on the front surface on the left side in the front view from the portion where the lower right front cover 2582 is attached.

The lower right front cover 2582 of the second starting port unit 2580 corresponds to an inclined surface 2582a in which the bottom of the second attacker space 2510n is formed on the upper surface and is inclined so that the left side in the front view is lower, and the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585. A display hole 2582b through which the normal symbol display 1189 of the normal symbol display board 1191a faces forward, and a through hole 2582c that extends in an arc shape along the right side of the front view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. , A plate-shaped partition piece 2582d for partitioning the inside of the through port 2582c in a plurality of vertical directions is provided.

The guidance member 2584 of the second starting port unit 2580 is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and can guide a game ball that has not been received by the second starting port 2587b to the left in front view.

The gate member 2585 of the second starting port unit 2580 is arranged below the gate portion 2585a that penetrates the opening 2581a of the unit base plate 2581, projects forward, receives the game ball, and guides the game ball backward. A barrier portion 2585b that penetrates the opening 2581a and protrudes forward in a frame shape, a penetration opening 2585c that extends downward from the lower end of the gate portion 2585a to the lower side of the barrier portion 2585b and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and left and right of the penetration opening 2585c. It is provided with a passage member 2587 extending from both sides to the rear and a holding piece 2585d for holding the passage lid 2588. Further, the gate member 2585 includes a sensor holding portion 2585e that holds the gate sensor 2586 from the rear side above the gate portion 2585a. The gate member 2585 is made of a transparent material, and the inside of the gate portion 2585a and the second starting port 2587b can be visually recognized from the player side.

The passage member 2587 of the second starting port unit 2580 guides the game ball guided backward by the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 to the front and bulges backward in an arc shape, and below the guide passage 2587a. A second starting port 2587b that opens in the front-rear direction on the side to allow the game ball to pass through, a discharge passage 2587c that guides the game ball that has passed through the second starting port 2587b backward and discharges it downward, and a second It is provided with a sensor holding unit 2587d for holding a second starting port sensor 2593 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the starting port 2587b, and a solenoid holding unit 2587e for holding the starting port solenoid 2590. The passage member 2587 can hold the start port solenoid 2590 by the solenoid holding portion 2587e so that the plunger 2590a moves forward and backward from the lower surface.

The passage lid 2588 of the second starting port unit 2580 has a first opening 2588a and a first opening 2588a through which the extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 and the rear end of the second link member 2592 are inserted. It is provided with a second opening 2588b through which the extension piece 2589b of the door member 2589 is inserted through the front side of the door member 2589 in the left-right direction.

The door member 2589 of the second starting port unit 2580 includes a door portion 2589a that can close the second starting port 2587b from the front side, and an extension piece 2589b that extends rearward from the lower end of the door portion 2589a and the right end in the front view. It is provided with a transmission pin 2589c protruding to the right from the rear end of the ejector 2589b. The door member 2589 is rotatably supported on both the left and right sides of the lower end of the door portion 2589a by the passage member 2587 and the passage lid 2588 at the position of the lower front end of the second starting port 2587a. .. Further, the extension piece 2589b of the door member 2589 extends to the right side of the front view of the passage lid 2588 at the rear end through the second opening 2588b of the passage lid 2588. Further, the transmission pin 2589c is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2592d of the second link member 2592.

The first link member 2591 of the second starting port unit 2580 has a plunger mounting portion 2591a to which the tip of the plunger 2590a of the starting port solenoid 2590 is attached and supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction by the passage lid 2588, and the plunger mounting portion 2591a. It includes an extension portion 2591b extending downward from the right end of the front view and a link pin 2591c protruding downward from the lower end of the extension portion 2591b to the right side of the front view. The lower end of the extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 extends to the right side of the front view of the passage lid 2588 through the first opening 2588a of the passage lid 2588. Further, the link pin 2591c is slidably inserted into the link slit 2592c of the second link member 2592.

The second link member 2592 of the second starting port unit 2580 is formed at the rear end of the main body 2592a extending in the front-rear direction in a strip shape and the main body 2592a, and is rearward of the extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591. A shaft portion 2592b that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left-right direction by a passage member 2587 and a passage lid 2588 at a position, and a shaft portion 2592b formed at a position closer to the front end and penetrating the main body 2592a and the main body 2592a. A long hole extending in the longitudinal direction, a link slit 2592c into which the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 is slidably inserted, and a link slit 2592c formed at the front end of the main body 2592a, penetrating the main body 2592a and in the longitudinal direction of the main body 2592a. It is provided with a transmission slit 2592d in which a transmission pin 2589c of a door member 2589 is slidably inserted in an elongated elongated hole shape.

The lower right decorative board 2597 of the second starting port unit 2580 has a plurality of LEDs located at a position corresponding to the through hole 2581b of the unit base plate 2581 and a position above the upper end of the unit base plate 2581. It is formed in an inverted L shape. As a result, the inside of the through hole 2582c of the lower right front cover 2582 and the upper side of the inclined surface 2582a can be light-emitting decorated.

In the second starting port unit 2580 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the plunger 2590a of the starting port solenoid 2590 protrudes downward, and the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 stands up substantially vertically. The second starting port 2587b is closed by member 2589 (see FIG. 146). In a normal state, a game ball that has entered the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 from above is detected by the gate sensor 2586 and then sent from the gate portion 2585a to the guide passage 2587a of the rear passage member 2587. The guide passage 2587a is sent to the lower barrier portion 2585b of the front gate portion 2585a. Then, it is sent to the guiding member 2584 through the frame of the barrier portion 2585b and the front side of the second starting port 2587b closed by the door member 2589, and is guided to the left in the front view by the guiding member 2584 to play the game area. It is released into 1100.

When the start port solenoid 2590 is energized from the normal state, the second start port unit 2580 rises so that the plunger 2590a is immersed in the start port solenoid 2590, and the first link member 2591 also rises together with the plunger 2590a. Then, as the first link member 2591 rises, the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 slides in the link slit 2592c of the second link member 2592, and at the same time, the second link member 2592 passes through the link slit 2592c. It rotates around the shaft portion 2592b at the rear end in the direction in which the tip rises. When the tip of the second link member 2592 rotates in the rising direction, the transmission pin 2589c of the door member 2589 slides in the transmission slit 2592d at the tip of the second link member 2592, and at the same time, the transmission pin 2589c rises. The door member 2589 rotates. As a result, the upper end of the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 is rotated in the direction of moving forward, the second starting port 2587b closed by the door portion 2589a is opened, and the second starting port 2587a is opened. The game ball to the door becomes acceptable (see FIG. 147).

The 2600 on the right passage cover of the center accessory 2500 has a transparent plate shape and is decorated on the front surface. The right passage cover 2600 closes the front surface of the attacker passage 2509a above the second attacker space 2510n and the front surface of the bypass passage 2510o. Further, 2605 under the right passage cover of the center accessory 2500 has a transparent plate shape and is decorated on the front surface. The lower right passage cover 2605 closes the front surface of the second attacker space 2510n of the attacker passage 2509a and covers the front surface of the lower right front cover 2582 in the second starting port unit 2580.

The center right light emitting unit 2610 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rear side of the right passage cover 2600 on the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570, and has a front upper right decorative board 2611 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. , Covers the rear side of the front right middle decorative board 2612, which is arranged along the lower end of the second attacker unit 2570 on the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear side of the table upper right decorative board 2611. The upper right board cover 2613, the right middle board cover 2614 attached to the lower rear side of the upper right board cover 2613 and covering the rear side of the front right middle decorative board 2612, and the front relay board 2615 arranged behind the upper right board cover 2613. And a board cover 2616 that covers the rear side of the front relay board 2615 and is attached to the rear side of the upper right board cover 2613.

The center right light emitting decoration unit 2640 of the center accessory 2500 is behind the center right decoration body 2641 having translucency by three-dimensionally imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the center right decoration body 2641. The center right decorative board 2642 arranged on the side and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side and the center right decorative board 2642 arranged on the rear side of the center right decorative board 2642 are supported from the rear side and on the rear side of the center base 2510. The board cover 2644 to be attached, the protective cover right decorative board 2644 on which a plurality of LEDs arranged behind the board cover 2645 and capable of irradiating light toward the right side of the front view of the protective cover 2650 are mounted, and the protective cover right. It is provided with a substrate support member 2645 that supports the decorative substrate 2644 and is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 2634.

The center-top effect unit 2660 of the center accessory 2500 is a center-top drive unit 2670 attached to the center base 2510, and a center-top movable decorative unit 2690 that is arranged in front of the center-top drive unit 2670 and is raised and lowered by the center-top drive unit 2670. And the center upper decoration 2700 attached to the upper side of the center upper movable decoration unit 2690 and the front surface of the center upper drive unit 2670.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the center-top drive unit 2670 of the center-top production unit 2660 has a shallow box-shaped unit base 2671 that is attached to the front side of the center base 2510 and extends in the left-right direction and has an open front. The front drive motor 2672, which is attached to the rear side of the base 2671 and whose rotary shaft penetrates the unit base 2671 and extends to the front side, and the drive gear fixed to the rotary shaft of the front drive motor 2672, mesh with the drive gear. A driven gear that is rotatably supported by the unit base and has a detection piece that extends rearward in a plate shape, and is rotatably supported by the unit base by engaging with the driven gear and at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. It is equipped with an action gear having an action pin protruding forward.

Further, the drive unit 2670 on the center is arranged at a position away from the action slit and the action slit in which the action pin of the action gear is slidable, and is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit base. The first transmission, which is formed at the tip of the first shaft and the tip of the first gear, which extends long from the first shaft to a position farther from the action slit, and extends along the line passing through the center of rotation. A second gear formed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first gear portion extends across the slit and the first shaft portion, and arranged in an arc shape along a circumference having a shorter radius than the first shaft portion to the working slit. The first gear portion having one gear portion and the second gear portion, the second gear portion, which meshes with the first gear portion of the first link member and is arranged in an arc shape along the circumference having the same radius as the first gear portion. The second shaft part, which is located in the center of the two gear parts and is rotatably supported by the unit base, has the same length as the first rod part of the first link member in the direction opposite to the second shaft part. It includes an extended second rod and a second link member having a second transmission slit formed at the tip of the second rod and extending along a line passing through the center of rotation. The first link member and the second link member are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and the first paddle portion and the second paddle portion respectively extend outward in the left-right direction with respect to the first shaft portion and the second shaft portion. ing.

Further, the drive unit 2670 on the center is attached to the front side of the unit base 2671, and covers the drive gear, the driven gear, the action gear, the first link member, and the front side of the second link member, and the unit cover and the unit base. An elevating shaft whose upper and lower ends are supported by the 2671 near both left and right ends of the unit base 2671 and extends in the vertical direction, and a motor base which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2671 and a front drive motor 2672 is attached to the rear surface. And the elevating position detection sensor that detects the elevating position of the movable decorative body 2690 on the center by detecting the detection piece of the driven gear attached to the unit base 2671, and the decorative body on the center between the unit base 2671 and the unit cover. It is provided with a decorative substrate on the center, which is arranged at a position corresponding to 2700 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The unit cover has notches extending downward and vertically from the elevating shafts at both left and right ends toward the center side and being open.

Further, although detailed illustration of the movable decorative body unit 2690 on the center of the directing unit 2660 on the center is omitted, the logo decorative body 2691 having a predetermined logo formed in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and having translucency is used. , A transmissive unit arranged on the rear side of the logo decoration body 2691 and having translucency, a movable decorative body decorative board arranged on the rear side of the transmissive unit and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a movable on the center. Decorative body A back cover that covers the rear side of the decorative substrate and is attached to the rear side of the logo decoration body 2691, and the first transmission slit and the second transmission slit of the first link member in the drive unit 2670 on the center that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the back cover. A pair of transmission pins that are slidably inserted into the second transmission slit of the link member, and a unit in the center upper drive unit 2670 that is attached to the rear side of the back cover at positions outside the pair of transmission pins in the left-right direction. It is provided with a pair of elevating sliders that are supported up and down by an elevating shaft through a notch in the cover.

The transmissive unit of the movable decorative body unit 2690 on the center is arranged in the rear side of the logo decorative body 2691 and has a translucent front diffusion sheet, and is arranged in the rear side of the diffusion sheet in a frame shape along the characters of the logo. The formed front reflector, a colored color filter that is placed behind the front reflector and has an opening corresponding to the letters of the logo and has transparency, and a colored color filter that is placed behind the color filter and corresponds to the letters of the logo. It is provided with a post-diffusing sheet having an open opening and capable of diffusing light, and a post-reflector arranged on the rear side of the post-diffusing sheet and formed in a shape conforming to the characters of the logo.

The movable decorative body unit 2690 on the center can slide (up and down) in the vertical direction by supporting the elevating slider on the elevating shaft of the drive unit 2670 on the center.

Further, the center upper decorative body 2700 of the center upper effect unit 2660 has a container-shaped decorative body main body in which a predetermined decoration is applied to the front surface and the rear side is open, and a container-shaped decorative body main body arranged on the rear side of the decorative body main body to decorate the central upper decorative body. It includes a diffusing member that diffuses light from the substrate, a frame-shaped reflector that is arranged on the rear side of the diffusing member, and a translucent decorative member that is attached to the front side of the main body of the decorative body.

When the drive motor 2672 is rotationally driven in the center-top effect unit 2660 of the present embodiment, the action gear rotates via the drive gear and the driven gear, and the action pin of the action gear revolves at a predetermined radius. Then, when the action pin revolves, the action pin slides in the action slit of the first link member, and the first link member rotates in a predetermined direction around the first shaft portion with the sliding. .. When the first link member rotates, the second gear of the second link member meshes with the first gear portion of the first link member, so that the second link member becomes the first link member centering on the second shaft portion. Will rotate in the opposite direction. Therefore, the tips of the first rod portion and the second rod portion of the first link member and the second link member rotate in the vertical direction while maintaining the same height as each other, and the first rod portion and the first rod portion are rotated. The transmission pin of the movable decoration on the center 2690 slides in the first transmission slit and the second transmission slit provided at the tip of the two paddles, and at the same time, the movable decoration on the center moves in the vertical direction. At this time, since the pair of elevating sliders of the movable decorative body on the center 2690 are slidably supported by the elevating shafts of the drive unit on the center, the movable decorative body on the center can be smoothly moved up and down.

Next, the flow of the game ball in the center accessory 2500 will be described. First, on the left side of the front view of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIG. 138, when the game ball flowing down to the left route 1100L side enters the warp entrance 2503 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502, It will circulate in the warp passage 2504 formed by the center base 2510 and the left passage cover 2530. More specifically, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has entered the warp entrance 2503 is first zigzag in the front-rear direction by the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530. It is guided downward while rolling. The game ball guided by this zigzag can be visually recognized from the player side through the upper warp passage cover 2531. Further, by guiding the game ball in a zigzag manner, it is possible to suppress the flow speed of the game ball from increasing.

The game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 and is guided by the passage recess 2510a and the upper warp passage cover 2531 is supplied to the right end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 arranged in the distribution space recess 2510c. .. Then, the game ball supplied to the left end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 rolls to the left in the front view along the inclination of the rolling surface 2521, and passes through the lowest discharging portion 2522. And rolls to the left of the release section 2522. As shown in the figure, the left side of the rolling surface 2521 with respect to the discharging portion 2522 is inclined so that the left end side is higher, so that the game ball climbs the slope, the rolling speed is attenuated, and the speed becomes 0. Then, the rolling starts to the right according to the inclination of the rolling surface 2521.

Since the inclination angle on the right side of the rolling surface 2521 is larger than that on the left side, it is difficult for the game ball that has rolled from the left side to the right to climb the slope on the right side, and the rolling surface 2521 is rearward by the releasing unit 2522. Therefore, it will be discharged to the guidance surface 2524 on the left side of the ridge 2523 with high probability, and will be distributed to the left side of the front view (warp outlet 2505 side) by the ridge 2523. The game ball, which is distributed and guided to the guide surface 2524 on the left side with respect to the ridge portion 2523, enters the opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 through the right opening 2510 d of the center base 2510, and enters the lower warp passage member 2550. It is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 through 2550 to the stage 2506 (first stage 2506a).

In this stage 2506, since the warp outlet 2505 is arranged at the left end of the front view of the first stage 2506a, the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2506a moves the first stage 2506a to the right. The rolling is started, and while the game ball has the momentum of rolling, the first stage 2506a is rolled in the left-right direction. Then, the game ball that has rolled the first stage 2506a is discharged forward from the guide portion 2506e, and is supplied to the second stage 2506b on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2506a. Also in the second stage 2506b, while the game ball has the momentum of rolling, the second stage 2506b is rolled in the left-right direction and is discharged from the guide portion 2506e into the game area 1100 in front.

By the way, a chance entrance 2506c is opened substantially in the center of the first stage 2506a, and when a game ball rolling on the first stage 2506a enters the chance entrance 2506c, a chance exit below the second stage 2506b. It is discharged from 2506d into the game area 1100. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, the chance exit 2506d is located directly above the first starting port 2201, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2506d is received by the first starting port 2201 with a high probability.

On the other hand, when the game ball discharged rearward from the discharge portion 2522 of the distribution member 2520 is distributed to the left side of the front view of the ridge portion 2523, it is guided by the guide surface 2524 on the left side of the ridge portion 2523 and covers after the left passage. It is supplied to the release slope 2542 of 2540. Then, the game ball supplied to the release slope 2542 rolls forward according to the inclination, passes through the left opening 2510e of the center base 2510, and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510b. Slope. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2503 is distributed to the left side, that is, the discharge port 2508 side by the ridge portion 2523 of the distribution member 2520, it is returned to the game area 1100 without being supplied to the stage 2506 and is returned to the game area 1100L. Will flow down again.

Further, the game ball that flows down from the upper part in the game area 1100 to the left route 1100L and does not enter the warp entrance 2503 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is formed on the lower left side of the warp entrance 2503. The shelf portion 2510f of the center base 2510 guides the player to the left in the front view, and enters the entrance 2507 opened near the inner circumference of the game area 1100. Then, the game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 is guided by the guide passage 2532a of the guide passage cover 2532 onto the guide piece 2510h that forms a part of the upper part of the distribution space recess 2510c of the center base 2510. The game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 and is guided by the guide passage 2532a can be visually recognized from the player side through the guide passage cover 2532.

The guide passage 2532a and the guide piece 2510h are located directly above the left end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 when viewed from the front, and the game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 for the player is distributed as if it were. It is possible to give the illusion of being guided to the member 2520. The game ball guided to the guide piece 2510h through the guide passage 2532a is guided backward by the guide piece 2510h, passes through the passage port 2510 g of the center base 2510, and reaches the left passage rear cover 2540 on the rear side of the center base 2510. Be guided. Then, the game ball guided to the left passage rear cover 2540 is guided to the release slope 2542 arranged below the distribution member 2520 by the guide wall 2541 on the rear side of the distribution member 2520, and then released. It rolls forward by the slope 2542, passes through the left opening 2510e of the center base 2510, and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510b.

Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the left route 1100L in the game area 1100 and has not entered the warp entrance 2503 enters the entrance 2507 and passes through the guide passage 2532a or the like from the discharge port 2508 to the left route in the game area 1100. It is released again to 1100L.

On the other hand, on the right side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. It enters the branch passage 2510k of 2510 and is sent to the branch space 2510l. In the branch space 2510l, a branch sensor 2620 is arranged immediately below the downstream end of the branch passage 2510k, and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 with high probability. The branch sensor 2620 is in a non-detection state in a normal gaming state (a state in which the branch sensor is not enabled).

The game ball sent to the branch passage 2510k of the center base 2510 is sent from the lower right corner of the front view of the branch passage 2510k to the second attacker space 2510n through the connecting passage 2510 m. At the entrance of the second attacker space 2510n, a guide portion 2510p inclined so as to be lowered toward the second prize opening 2509 is formed, and the game ball is directed toward the second prize opening 2509 by this guidance portion 2510p. And flow down. Then, in the normal state, the second large winning opening 2509 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2527 of the second attacker unit 2570, and the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is seconded by the second opening / closing member 2572. The acceptance to the grand prize opening 2509 is blocked, and the left side of the second opening / closing member 2572 in the second attacker space 2510n flows downward in the front view.

At this time, in the second opening / closing member 2572, the stopper piece 2572d is in contact with the stopper portion 2571j provided on the left side of the lower right protruding portion 2571i of the unit base 2571, and rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It is in a state of being blocked. Therefore, when the game ball from the guiding portion 2510p comes into contact with the right side of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572, a force that tends to rotate the second opening / closing member 2572 in the counterclockwise direction acts. However, the second member 2572 does not rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

The game ball that has flowed down the second attacker space 2510n without being accepted by the second prize opening 2509 has an inclined surface 2582a of the lower right front cover 2582 of the second starting port unit 2580 forming the bottom of the second attacker space 2510n. It rolls to the left in the front view and is discharged downward from the left end of the inclined surface 2582a, which is outside the second attacker space 2510n.

The gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is arranged directly below the left end of the inclined surface 2582a in the second starting port unit 2580, and the game ball discharged downward from the second attacker space 2510n of the attacker passage 2509a is , It will pass through the gate portion 2585a with high probability. The game ball that could not pass through the gate portion 2585a will flow downward through either the left or right side of the gate portion 2585a. The game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is detected by the gate sensor 2586 and then guided backward, and the lower frame of the gate portion 2585a is guided by the guide passage 2587a of the passage member 2587 arranged on the rear side. Guided into the shaped barrier portion 2585b, it flows down the front surface of the second starting port 2587b.

In the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal lottery result is drawn, and the door member 2589 closing the second starting port 2587b according to the lottery normal lottery result. Open and close. Specifically, in a normal state, the plunger 2590a of the start port solenoid 2590 of the second start port unit 2580 is lowered by its own weight, and the first link member 2591 and the second link member 2592 are lowered by the lowering of the plunger 2590a. The door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 stands up substantially vertically and closes the second starting port 2587b. That is, in the normal state, the second starting port 2587b is closed by the door member 2589, and the game ball cannot be accepted.

If the result of the normal lottery drawn based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is "missing", the start port solenoid 2590 is not energized and the plunger 2590a remains lowered. Therefore, when the normal lottery result is "missing", as shown in FIG. 146, the door member 2589 closes the second starting port 2587b, and the game ball that has flowed down from the barrier portion 2585b through the gate portion 2585a. Passes through the front side of the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 without being received by the second starting port 2587a, flows down onto the guiding member 2584, and is discharged to the left in the front view by the guiding member 2584.

On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery drawn based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is "hit", the start port solenoid 2590 is energized to raise the plunger 2590a, and the first link member 2591 and the second link The door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 is rotated in the direction in which the tip thereof moves forward via the member 2592, and the second starting port 2587b is opened (see FIG. 147). In this state, the game ball that has flowed down from the barrier portion 2585b through the gate portion 2585a abuts on the back side of the door member 2589 that has rotated forward and is guided to the second starting port 2587b side, and is guided to the second starting port 2587b. Will be accepted by. Then, the game ball received in the second starting port 2587b is detected by the second starting port sensor 2593 and then discharged downward through the discharge passage 2587c.

In the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the normal lottery result is immediately drawn, and if the lottery normal lottery result is "hit", the start port solenoid 2590 is immediately set. Since the power is turned on and the second starting port 2587b can be received, the game ball for which the "hit" is drawn is received by the second starting port 2587b with an extremely high probability.

Further, in the second attacker unit 2570 of the present embodiment, the second attacker solenoid 2574 is energized according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. Then, the plunger 2574a retracts into the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the second opening / closing member 2572 rotates clockwise in the front view via the link member 2575 (see FIG. 148). In this state, the tip of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572 is separated from the upper end of the second large winning opening 2509 in the right direction in the front view, and is located on the right side of the left end of the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510. , The game ball is ready to be accepted into the second prize opening 2509. Further, in this state, the second opening / closing member 2572 is in a state in which the stopper piece 257d is in contact with the stopper portion 2571j provided in the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, and the rotation in the clockwise direction in the front view is restricted. It has become.

Then, the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 passes through the second prize opening 2509, is guided to the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, is detected by the second count sensor 2578, and then receives. It is discharged from the portion 2571e through the passage port 2571d to the rear from the downstream end of the ball passage 2571l on the rear side of the unit base 2571. At this time, the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 comes into contact with the shaft portion 2752b of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening / closing member 2572, so that the game ball comes into contact with the tip of the blade portion 2572a. As compared with the above, the impact of the moment related to the second opening / closing member 257 is reduced, and the second opening / closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second attacker unit 2570, since the lower end side of the second opening / closing member 2527 is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the front-rear direction near the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509, the second opening / closing is performed. When the member 2572 is rotated to the open position, as shown in FIG. 148, the tip end (upper end) side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotated in the direction approaching the guide portion 2510p. As a result, the second opening / closing member 2572 is laid between the guiding portion 2510p and the second winning opening 2509, so that the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is transferred from the guiding portion 2510p to the second. (2) The opening / closing member 257 is rolled and accepted into the second large winning opening 2509, and the impact acting on the second opening / closing member 257 due to the flow of the game ball can be reduced, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is damaged. It can be difficult.

Further, when the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 rotates from the open position to the closed position, the tip (upper end) of the second opening / closing member 2572 is guided by the guiding portion 2510p. Since it rotates in a direction away from the guiding portion 2510p so as to block the above, it is possible to prevent the game ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p from being accepted into the second prize opening 2509 at this timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of game balls from being accepted into the second prize opening 2509 at the time of a big hit game or the like, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. it can.

In the second attacker unit 2570 of the present embodiment, when the second opening / closing member 2572 is in the open position, a game ball passes between the tip of the second opening / closing member 2572 and the lower passage wall 2510j of the guide portion 2510p. A possible gap is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the inclined portion 2510q side to the second opening / closing member 2572 when the second opening / closing member 2572 is in the open position, the game ball passes between the second opening / closing member 2572 and the passage wall 2510j. There is.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 152. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. is there.

The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the back wall 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b in which the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-rear direction. It is equipped with a box 3010. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is fixed to a box-shaped opening 3010b having an open front side and a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating the rear wall 3010a in the front-rear direction, and extending outward from the outer periphery of the front end to the rear side of the game panel 1150. It is provided with a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed to be smaller than the front view outer shape of the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

Although detailed description will be omitted, the back box 3010 is appropriately positioned with mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the production units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3500, 3600, 3700, 3800, and the like. Is formed in.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the panel relay board 3020 mounted on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b and at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. A lamp drive board 3021 mounted on the rear surface below the opening 3010b and at a position on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and a lamp drive board cover 3022 that covers the rear side of the lamp drive board 3021 and is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. The motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 on the right side of the front view of the opening 3010b, and the motor drive board cover 3024 that covers the rear side of the motor drive board 3023 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The front lamp relay board 3025 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 on the upper side of the motor drive board 3023, and the front lamp relay board cover 3026 that covers the rear side of the front lamp relay board 3025 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. And have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided on the front side of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and on the upper side of the opening 3010b on the back side effect unit relay board 3027, and on the front side of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 on the right side of the front view of the opening 3010b. It is provided with a back-rear movable decorative unit relay board 3028 to be attached.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 along the inner circumference of the opening 3010b, and is attached to the pair of decorative frames 3040 decorated on the front surface and the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3050 which is attached to the left side of the opening 3010b on the rear surface in a front view and supports the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in a detachable manner.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the opening 3010c in the back box 3010 and attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and the back lower middle effect unit 3100 and the back lower middle effect unit. The front of the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3300, and the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3300, which are arranged on both the left and right sides of the 3100 and are attached to the front of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, respectively. The ball discharge unit 3400 attached to the back box 3010, the back rear effect unit 3500 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 3010c in the back box 3010 and attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a, and the left and right sides of the opening 3010c in the back box 3010. The back left effect unit 3600 and the back right effect unit 3700 are arranged on the front side of the back rear effect unit 3500, respectively, and the back upper effect arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and on the front side of the back rear effect unit 3500. It is equipped with a unit 3800.

The lower back middle effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 puts the sub display unit 3110 provided with the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the elevating unit 3130 that moves up and down together with the sub display unit 3110, and the elevating unit 3130 and the sub display unit 3110 into a gaming state. It is equipped with a lower back middle drive unit 3150 that moves up and down accordingly.

The back lower left production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is arranged on the left side of the front view of the lower left inner movable decoration 3210 and the lower left inner movable decoration 3210 that imitate a predetermined character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The lower left inner movable decorative body 3220, which imitates a character different from the lower left inner movable decorative body 3210, the lower left inner movable decorative body 3210, and the lower left outer movable decorative body 3220, respectively, depending on the playing state. It is equipped with a lower back left drive unit 3250 that can be raised and lowered independently.

The back lower right production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the lower right inner movable decoration 3310 and the lower right inner movable decoration 3310 that imitate a different character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The lower right inner movable decorative body 3320 that imitates a character different from the lower right inner movable decorative body 3310, the lower right inner movable decorative body 3310, and the lower right outer movable decorative body 3320, respectively, depending on the playing state. It is equipped with a lower back right drive unit 3350 that can be raised and lowered independently.

The ball discharge unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is received by the general winning opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the first starting opening 2201 of the starting port unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300, and is received on the rear side of the game panel 1150. The ball discharge passage member 3410 that guides and discharges the game ball guided to the lower side, the general winning opening sensor 3421 that detects the game ball received in the general winning openings 2101, 2301, and the first starting opening 2201 accepts the game ball. It includes a first start port sensor 3422 that detects the game ball, and a magnetic detection sensor 3423 that can detect the magnetism in the vicinity of the first start port 2201.

The back-rear effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 has a back-rear movable decorative body 3510 extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010, imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back rear movable decorative body 3510 is supported so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and the back rear left drive unit 3530 attached to the front left side of the opening 3010b in the front of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the back rear movable. It is provided with a back rear right / left drive unit 3560 that supports the right end of the decorative body 3510 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction and is attached to the right side of the front view of the opening 3010b in front of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010.

The back left effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 has a back left movable decorative unit 3610 in which a plurality of decorations imitating flowers are formed on the front surface, and a back left movable decorative body 3610 in a front view back box according to the game state. It includes a back left drive unit 3650 that rotates toward the center of the opening 3010b of 3010.

The back right effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 has a back right movable decoration unit 3710 in which a plurality of decorations imitating flowers are formed on the front surface, and a back right movable decoration body 3710 in a front view back box according to the game state. The back right drive unit 3750 that rotates to the center side of the opening 3010b of 3010, and the rear side of the game panel 1150 that is attached to the front side of the back right drive unit 3750 and is accepted by the second big winning opening 2509 and the second starting opening 2587b. It is provided with a ball discharging member 3790 that guides and discharges the game ball guided to the lower direction.

The back-up production unit 3800 of the back unit 3000 is a back-up movable decorative unit 3810 in which a plurality of decorations imitating flowers on the front and reliefs imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed. A back-up drive unit 3850 that rotates the back-up movable decorative unit 3810 toward the center of the opening 3010b of the front-view back box 3010 according to the gaming state.

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Subsequently, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing piece 1902. be able to.

Specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a recess formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and two fixed parts projecting from the right side of the front view. After inserting the piece 1902 into the liquid crystal fixing portion (not shown) of the back box 3010, the fixing piece 1902 protruding from the left piece in the front view is fixed by the lock mechanism 3050 supported on the rear surface of the back box 3010. Can be attached to the back box 3010.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115 and the like, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 containing a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 153), and the like, and a peripheral control board box. It has a volume 1912 that extends rearward from the bottom of the 1910. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like.

[3. Various boards]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of the peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 is a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on a command from the peripheral control board 4140. It is provided with a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100h to which the detection signals from various detection switches are input, and the main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. It includes a drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d and RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start port sensor 3422 that detects a game ball received by the first start port 2201, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2587b. Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3421 that detects the game ball received into the 2595 and the general winning opening 2101, 2301 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the gate sensor 2586 and the general winning opening. Detection signals from the sensor 3421, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, and the magnetic detection sensor 3423 are input via the panel relay board 3020 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It is supposed to be done.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2590, first, via the panel relay board 3020. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2107 and the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the first special symbol is displayed via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3020, the function display board 1191, and the normal symbol display board 1191a. Instrument 1185, 2nd special symbol display 1186, 1st special symbol storage display 1184, 2nd special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display 1188, game status display 1183, round display A drive signal is output to the device 1190.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the gate sensor 2586, the branch sensor 2620, the first count sensor 2111, and the second count sensor 2578 are non-contact type electromagnetic waves. While the proximity switch of the type is used, the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3421. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b and frequently passes through the gate portion 2585a and the branch sensor 2620, so that the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port are used. The detection of the game ball by the sensor 2593 and the gate sensor 2586 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the branch sensor 2620, and the gate sensor 2586. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509 are opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the first count sensor 2111 and the second The detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2578 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2101,230 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3421 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3421 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the RAM 4100e in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. The various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball, etc., performs the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 585. The launch control unit 4120 that controls, the error LED display 4130 that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and the prize ball tank 720. , The tank rail 731, and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation.

[3-2A. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, the external WDT4111c (external watch dock timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4111a is operating normally, and the award. It includes a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU4111a also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball out switch 750. , The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 first passes through the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first input to the payout control. It is input to the circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED display. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 is sent via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of actually paid out game balls is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal of, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the stored game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (CR is not connected). Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock" (specifically, it is in stock). , The number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b first pass through the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Is input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O port. It is received by 4111b and input to the payout control MPU4111a. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and also sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining degree indicator 365c on the CR unit connection terminal plate. It is output to 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch. It includes a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is first the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

Based on the signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and the constant current is triggered by the completion of the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. By stopping the output of the ball feeding member 584, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU4111a can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 4110 in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 4110.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 153, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It includes a sound source IC 4140c to be performed, and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 3021, or the game board. A motor attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various production units provided in 4. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3023 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base board 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 or to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting data from the control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d are output to the sound source IC 4140c.

The detection signals from the various in-situ detection sensors for detecting the in-situ of the various production units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is monitored based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It controls the flow of music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speaker 821, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The peripheral control MPU 4140a has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, and the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3021 and the motor drive board 3023 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. , It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 3021 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command. The game board 4 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the LED of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. It is output to the LED of each decorative board.

Further, the motor drive board 3023 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor provided in the game board 4, a solenoid, and the like.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It may be input via the lamp drive board 3021 or the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and mounts the lamp drive board 3021, the motor drive board 3023, etc. on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the peripheral relay terminal board. From the side speaker 130 and the upper speaker 222,262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 3021 and the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. , Controls the flow of music and sound effects that match various effects. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the bass speaker 821. , It has become possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than before.

[3-4. LCD control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 153, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and various processing programs. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 described above, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 and a sub liquid crystal display. It includes a character ROM 4150d that stores various data on the screen displayed on the device 3111, and a character RAM 4150e that transfers and copies various data stored in the character ROM 4150d.

This liquid crystal control MPU4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP4150c based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a receives an execution signal described later from the VDP4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010 and corresponding schedule data. Multiple control data (display commands) and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which various data are transferred from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance for screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 according to the progress of the schedule data. Has been done.

The liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. When the VDP4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, the VDP4150c outputs an executing signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is held. This is a method of outputting data to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device It will affect the speed of drawing on 3111. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. For example, when displaying various people on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on 3111.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 sequentially perform a main scan that sets a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel in order from left to right when viewed from the front, and intersects that one direction. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction in which the main scan is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the main scanning is performed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. From left to right, the data is output to each line of pixels. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data of the minutes, the main scanning is sequentially output to the pixels of one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

[4. Game content]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are generated by the game panel 1150. It is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged in front of the player, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking force is. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and when the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view, that is, the left route 1100L side from the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 It passes between the plurality of protrusions 2512 and flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2503 that opens on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the distribution member 2520 provided in the warp passage 2504 rolls. The release portion 2522 supplied to the moving surface 2521 and arranged substantially in the center of the rolling surface 2521 is released to the ridge portion 2523 and returned to the warp outlet 2505 side supplied to the stage 2506 or into the game area 1100. It is distributed to either of the exit 2508 sides. In the present embodiment, the game ball is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side with a high probability.

Then, the game ball distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the stage 2506. In this stage 2506, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2506a in the stage 2506, and is discharged forward from the position of the lowest guide portion 2506e after rolling the first stage 2506a in the left-right direction. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2506a is supplied to the second stage 2506b arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2506a, and is the most after rolling the second stage 2506b in the left-right direction. From the lowered portion, the return is discharged forward into the game area 1100 above the first start port 2201 in the start port unit 2200.

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2506 enters the chance entrance 2506c opened on the left-right central rear side of the first stage 2506a, the chance exit 2506d opened directly above the first starting port 2201 enters the game area 1100. It is released and has a high probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2201. Then, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2201 and detected by the first start port sensor 3422, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are temporarily added to the count value of the prize ball counter. Be remembered. When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 390 times after the end of the previous big hit game state and the big hit is reached), the prize ball counter counts. A predetermined payout command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls stored in the value is paid out, and the payout control board 4110 pays out the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command. The motor 744 is controlled to pay out the game ball to the upper plate 301.

If the game ball released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 flows down to the left side of the first start port 2201 without winning a prize in the first start port 2201, the front side unit 2300 arranged downstream of the game ball There is a possibility of winning the general winning opening 2301, and when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 2301 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3421, the payout control board 4110 is used in the main control board 4100 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the player, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command to transfer a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the upper plate 301. It is supposed to be paid out to.

Further, when the game ball released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 flows down to the right side of the first starting port 2201 without winning the first starting port 2201, it is extremely rare that the general winning opening of the attacker unit 2100. You may win 2101. In addition, when the first big winning opening 2102 is open due to a big hit game or the like, it is possible to win a prize in the first big winning opening 2102 with a high probability.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it is guided to the left in the front view by the shelf portion 2510f of the center base 2510 and enters the entrance 2507 that opens at the left end. Then, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 below the distribution member 2520. Then, the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2508 into the game area 1100 is brought to the center side of the game area 1100 under the center accessory 2500 by the left shelf portion 2302 of the front side unit 2300, and the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300 arranged below. The game ball released from the discharge port 2508 may win a prize in the first start port 2201 although the probability is lower than that of the game ball released from the stage 2506 to the game area 1100.

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters the right route 1100R on the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory Through a narrow gap between the outer circumference on the right side of 2500 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100, the player enters the attacker passage 2509a opened near the abutment portion 1114 of the front component 1110A in the inner circumference of the game area 1100.

The game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a passes through the branch passage 2510k, the branch space 2510l, the connecting passage 2510m, and the second attacker space 2510n, and from the downstream end of the second attacker space 2510n to the gate portion of the second starting port unit 2580. It is released directly above 2585a. A game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a by hitting right will win a prize in the second big winning opening 2509 with an extremely high probability when the second big winning opening 2509 is open due to a big hit game or the like.

The game ball released directly above the gate portion 2585a enters the gate portion 2585a with an extremely high probability, and after being detected by the gate sensor 2586, passes through the front side of the second prize opening 2587b and enters the game area 1100. Be released.

At this time, when the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, a normal random number as a result of the normal lottery is generated on the main control board 4100 based on the detection signal. Based on this ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variablely displayed (for example, the ordinary symbol display 1189 composed of two red and green LEDs emits light alternately) for a predetermined time (for example). For example, the normal symbol based on the normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after the lapse of 0.1 seconds to 1 second is stopped and displayed (one of the two LEDs of the normal symbol display 1189 emits light). Will be done. In the present embodiment, the same variation display is performed on the ordinary symbol display board 1191a provided in the second start port unit 2580. The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

Specifically, if the drawn ordinary random number is a "normal hit" random number, it will be stopped and displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the drawn ordinary random number will be a "normal lost" random number. In the case of, the stop display (normal symbol display 1189 emits red light) is displayed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss. Then, when the normal symbol suggesting "normal hit" is stopped and displayed, the door member 2589 that closes the second starting port 2587b rotates in the opening direction for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). Then, the game ball can win a prize at the second starting port 2587b.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the door member 2589 reaches the start port solenoid 2590 at the timing of whether or not the game ball passing through the gate portion 2585a and drawing a "normal hit" reaches the front side of the door member 2589 that closes the second start port 2587b. This makes it possible to receive the ball in the second starting port 2587b, and when a "normal hit" is drawn, the ball is received in the second starting port 2587b with an extremely high probability.

Then, when the game ball is received by the second starting port 2587b by passing through the gate portion 2585a and drawing a "normal hit", it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2593 and based on the detection signal of the second starting port sensor 2593. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are temporarily stored in the count value of the prize ball number counter, as in the case where the first start port sensor 3422 detects the game balls. Then, when the predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 390 times after the end of the previous big hit game state and then the big hit is reached), the prize ball counter counts. A predetermined payout command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls stored in the value is paid out, and the payout control board 4110 pays out the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command. The motor 744 is controlled to pay out the game ball to the upper plate 301. Further, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out for each game ball entered into each winning opening or starting opening without storing the payout as described above.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball performs a driving operation (so-called right-handed) passing through the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game passes through the gate portion 2585a and the gate portion 2585a with an extremely high probability. If the ball draws a "normal hit", it will be accepted into the second starting port 2587b with an extremely high probability, so even beginners and players who are unfamiliar with the game can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2587b, and the player can enjoy it. You can do it.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the player can easily make the second starting port 2587b win the game ball by hitting the right side. Therefore, by winning the second starting port 2587b, the game ball can be easily won. If the number of game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed increases, and there is a risk of hesitating to install the pachinko machine 1. However, in this pachinko machine 1, if the number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2587b is changed from, for example, 3 to 1, a special lottery will be made by winning a prize to the 2nd starting port 2587b. By the lottery of the result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed without any problem.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586 while the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189, the changing normal symbol is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the ordinary random number is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is temporarily stored, and the display is suspended and stored. The number of ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of pending numbers) is displayed on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of stored LEDs can be suggested by the number of each LED that lights up. In this example, up to four LEDs can be stored and displayed. When the number of stored items exceeds four, the ordinary random numbers extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 are discarded.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and a "normal loss" is drawn, the door member 2589 that closes the second starting port 2587b maintains the state in which the second starting port 2587b is closed. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 that closes the second starting port 2587b, and is played by the guiding member 2584 at the diagonally upper right of the front view of the first large winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100. It is released into region 1100. The game ball released from the guiding member 2584 into the game area 1100 has a high probability of winning the first prize opening 2102 when the first prize opening 2102 is open due to a big hit game or the like. Therefore, at the time of a big hit game or the like in which the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 can be accepted, the game ball can be easily hit by hitting right so that the game ball flows down the right route 1100R. It is possible to win a prize in the first prize opening 2102 or the second prize opening 2509. Furthermore, when the second attacker unit 2570 controls the opening of the movable piece 2578b for a long time when the second prize opening 2509 is opened, the game ball is easily detected by the specific count sensor 2578a by right-handed striking. You can let them win a V prize.

By the way, in the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2201,201a and the second starting port 2587b, and the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593. When detected in, the first starting port 2201,201a generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number, and the second starting port 2587b generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Then, in the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol) is started based on the first special random number extracted by the first starting ports 2201,201a. The special symbol corresponding to the first special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result (first special lottery result). Further, in the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, the variable display of the special symbol (second special symbol) is started based on the second special random number extracted at the second starting port 2578b, and the second special symbol is displayed. (Ii) The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result (second special lottery result). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be executed at the same time, and the variable display of the second special symbol is from the variable display of the first special symbol. Is also given priority (priority change of the second special symbol). When such priority changes are made, even if there is a change hold for the first special symbol, those changes will start until all the change display of the second special symbol is completed (the change hold for the second special symbol is held). It will not be executed (until it is digested).

When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode suggesting "big hit" in the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second attacker unit 2570 is displayed. (Ii) A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) in which the opening / closing member 257 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern occurs, and during that time, the game ball is won by the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509. , You can get more game balls. When one game ball wins the first prize opening 2102 or the second prize opening 2509, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

At the first starting port 2201,201a and the second starting port 2587b, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol are also displayed in the same manner as the variation display of the normal symbol due to the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2585a. When the special symbol is variablely displayed on the display 1186, or when the special symbol cannot be variablely displayed, such as during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins a prize at the starting ports 2201,201a and the second starting port 2587b. Then, when it is detected by the first start port sensor 3422 or the second start port sensor 2593, it is detected by the first start port sensor 3422 or the second start port sensor 2593 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible. The first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the signal are temporarily stored and the display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is displayed in the first special symbol storage. It is displayed on the device 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187.

The first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinking. In this example, up to four can be memorized and displayed. If the number of stored items exceeds four, the extracted special random numbers are discarded.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority change of the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, when the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the second special symbol storage display 1187 The change of the second special symbol held in 1184 is started with priority, and after the digestion of all the stored second special random numbers is completed, the first special held in the first special symbol storage display 1184 The symbol change starts.

Further, in the main control board 4100, the special random numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 are set to predetermined random numbers. By collating with the determination table (also referred to as the jackpot determination table), it is determined whether the special random number is "missing" or "big hit". Further, in the main control board 4100, the symbol random numbers of the first symbol random number and the second symbol random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 are set to predetermined random numbers. By collating with the determination table (also referred to as the symbol determination table), the type of "big hit" (corresponding to "specific 1" to "specific 3" in FIG. 176 (B) described later) is determined. In addition, the types of jackpots determined by the symbol determination table include the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the type of opening of the V zone (short opening or long opening), the presence or absence of probability fluctuations after the jackpot, and the time saving period. Can be associated.

When the extracted first special random number or second special random number is a "big hit", the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and the second opening / closing member 2527 of the second attacker unit 2570. After that, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls satisfy either the condition of winning the first prize opening 2102 or the second prize opening 2509. Then, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the opening / closing member 2104 and the second opening / closing member 2572 is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "16R jackpot", 16 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The number of rounds in which the second prize opening 2509 is opened is predetermined. For example, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the second prize opening 2509 is opened and closed in the 13th round, while in other rounds, the second prize opening 2509 is opened and closed. Control is performed to open and close the first prize opening 2102. After the end of the predetermined number of rounds, for the "big hit", the big hit determination table may be exchanged with the big hit determination table or the like at the time of high probability according to the extracted symbol random numbers.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number or the second special random number is a "specific jackpot", the main control board 4100 has the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180 or When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 in a manner suggesting a "specific jackpot", the detection signal of the game ball from the branch sensor 2620 is set to a state in which it can be accepted (branch sensor enabled state). The opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 suspends the occurrence of a special advantageous gaming state in which the opening / closing operation is performed in a predetermined pattern. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 in a manner suggesting "specific jackpot", the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is jackpot ("specific jackpot"). An image showing ") is displayed, and an image prompting the player to perform a driving operation (right-handed) aiming at the branch sensor 2620 is displayed. After that, when the game ball hit right by the player passes through the branch sensor 2620 in the branch space 2510 l in the attacker passage 2509a and is detected, the opening / closing member 2104 and the second opening / closing member 2572 perform an opening / closing operation in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state is generated, and a "specific jackpot" game of the number of rounds based on the first special random number and the second special random number is performed.

Further, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is any of the general winning openings 2101, 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first major winning opening 2102, and the second major winning opening 2509. If no prize is won, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged downward from the rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1151. In addition, no matter which of the general winning openings 2101, 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first major winning opening 2102, and the second major winning opening 2509, the game ball wins a prize. The ball is discharged downward to the rear side of the game board 4 without being returned to the game area 1100.

The variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 153). , The variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol) on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is performed by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. Be controlled. As a result, since the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like controls the variation display of the symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like that the player pays particular attention to, it is related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 or the like. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the number of symbol variation patterns in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Further, the "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed during the "big hit" game are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the load of arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining and less likely to get tired of the player. It has become. Among the variable display of the symbol and the effect display performed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900, some of the characteristic displays in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail later in [9] and the like.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state), a right-handed hit is performed to promote the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2587b, but on the other hand, the second A part of the game ball released to the first prize opening 2102 side by the guiding member 2584, which was hit right to enter the starting opening 2587b but was not accepted by the second starting opening 2587b, is the first starting opening. In order to be accepted by 2201a, the first special symbol is changed not a little (although it is less than the number of changes of the second special symbol). That is, the first starting port 2201a is arranged on the flow path of the game ball that can enter the second starting port 2587b (corresponding to the flow path of the game ball when hitting to the right), so that the player can take the first position. Even if the player does not want the game ball to enter the start port 2201a, at least a part of the game ball launched toward the second start port 2587b is the first regardless of the player's intention. It can be received in the starting port 2201a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to adjust which of the first starting port 2201a and the second starting port 2587b the game ball is accepted by the operation of the player. There is. However, it is not necessarily disadvantageous for the player to accept the game ball in the first starting port 2201a regardless of the player's intention, and the game ball that is not accepted in the second starting port 2587 and is originally an out ball. Is accepted into the first starting port 2201a, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out, so that an additional privilege is given to the player.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball is received at the first starting port 2201a is not limited to the advantageous state. FIG. 188 is a schematic diagram for explaining the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the first starting port and the first winning opening. For example, in the big hit game before being controlled to the advantageous state, the player is urged to hit right in order to put the game ball into the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509. As shown in FIG. 188, a part of the game ball that is right-handed, passes through the gate portion 2585a, and is released to the first large winning opening 2102 side by the guiding member 2584 is received by the first starting opening 2201a. As described above, in the first starting port 2201a, the game balls released to the first large winning opening 2102 side by the guiding member 2584 are first at a predetermined ball entry ratio (for example, about 1/20 to 1/5). Since it is arranged at the position where the ball enters the start port 2201a, the game ball released to the first big winning opening 2102 side is first started at a predetermined ball entry ratio not only in the advantageous state but also during the big hit game. Accepted by mouth 2201a. Then, even if the game ball is received at the start port (here, the first start port 2201a) during the big hit game, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, so as long as the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is not reached, the ball enters. The special random number (first special random number) selected based on is temporarily stored and its display is suspended. Then, the reserved first special random number starts to fluctuate in the advantageous state controlled after the jackpot game ends, so that the first special symbol is almost certainly reserved at the start of the advantageous state. It can be a situation. In such a pachinko machine 1, it is possible to adjust by the operation of the player which of the first starting port 2201a and the first winning opening 2102 (or the second winning opening 2509) accepts the game ball. Although it is difficult to construct, if a game ball that can enter the first big winning opening 2102 enters the first starting opening 2201a during a big hit game, the winning ball corresponding to the winning (winning) Since the payout (for example, 3 pieces) is performed, the number of game balls held by the player increases. That is, even if a game ball that should enter the first prize opening 2102 is accepted by the first starting port 2201a, it does not necessarily disadvantage the player, and conversely, the number of game balls increases. Benefits are given.

In addition to controlling the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 appropriately drives the drive motor, drive solenoid, decorative substrate, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. It is possible to perform a movable effect and a light emitting effect, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emitting effect.

[5. Characteristic effect of the second prize opening]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is accepted into the second large winning opening 2509 arranged in the attacker passage 2509a in the center accessory 2500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given. Therefore, the game ball is accepted by the second opening / closing member 2572 into the second big winning opening 2509 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 (for example, a big hit game, etc.). When the open state is possible, the player performs a driving operation (right-handed in the present embodiment) so that the game ball enters the attacker passage 2509a in an attempt to accept the game ball into the second prize opening 2509. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of driving the game ball. Then, when the driven game ball enters the attacker passage 2509a and is guided by the guidance unit 2510p, the guidance unit 2510p guides the game ball toward the second prize opening 2509, so that the game ball is extremely high. It is possible to enter the second large winning opening 2509 with a probability, and the player can be entertained by giving benefits such as paying out the game ball by accepting the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to easily accept the game ball into the variable second large winning opening 2509 that is opened and closed by the second opening / closing member 2527, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the second big winning opening 2509 in the attacker passage 2509a is in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second big winning opening 2509 with an extremely high probability just by entering the attacker passage 2509a. Even an unfamiliar player such as a beginner can easily accept the game ball into the second prize opening 2509, and it is possible to reduce the feeling that the driving operation of the game ball is difficult, and entertain the game. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, since no obstacle nail is placed on the attacker passage 2509a provided with the second prize opening 2509 that is opened and closed by the second opening / closing member 2527, the flow (route) of the game ball in the attacker passage 2509a is stabilized. The game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a can be reliably reached to the guidance unit 2510p, and the guidance unit 2510p guides the game ball toward the second prize opening 2509 to win the second prize in the open state. It can be accepted into the mouth 2509.

As described in [2-5], a specific area 2509b is provided in the second large winning opening 2509 in which the admissibility of the game ball is adjusted by the movement of the movable piece 2578b. The game ball received into the second major winning opening 2509, which was opened when the "long-time V opening control (V long opening)" of 2578b is being performed, is detected by the specific count sensor 2578a. , It is easy to enter the specific area 2509b (V prize). That is, in the same manner as described above for easily winning the game ball in the second major winning opening 2509, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, "long-time opening of a specific area (V long opening)". During the big hit game associated with, the game ball can be easily won in the specific area 2509b. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by winning a V prize in the game ball, a specially advantageous privilege of being controlled to a game state (specifically, a high probability state) advantageous to the player after the big hit game is provided. Granted. Therefore, when the player wins a big hit (a big hit with V long opening) in which V opening control is performed for a long time, the player can easily win a V prize just by hitting right, and misses the V winning. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, since the game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a and has not been accepted into the second prize opening 2509 is discharged from the attacker passage 2509a into the game area 1100 again, the downstream side released in the game area 1000. There is a possibility that the gate portion 2586a provided on the side, the second starting opening 2587b, the general winning opening 2101, the first large winning opening 2102, etc. may be accepted, and the game ball was not accepted into the second large winning opening 2509. Even if it is disappointing, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2587b on the downstream side discharged from the attacker passage 2509a, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can do.

Further, since the game ball is guided toward the second prize opening 2509 by the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510, the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p is the first when the second prize opening 2509 is in the open state. (Ii) It becomes difficult to come into contact with the opening / closing member 2572, and it is possible to reduce damage to the second opening / closing member 257 due to the impact of the game ball coming into contact with it. It is possible to prevent the frustration from being remembered and degrading the interest. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game in which the second big winning opening 2509 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, more game balls than usual are hit aiming at the second big winning opening 2509, so that more games than usual The ball will come into contact with the second opening / closing member 2572, but as described above, since it is difficult for the game ball to come into contact with the second opening / closing member 2572 at the open position due to the guiding portion 2510p, many game balls are driven. However, the second opening / closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the game can be prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the second opening / closing member 257, and the game can be continuously enjoyed.

Further, since the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is tilted so that the extension line passes through the second large winning opening 2509 which is opened to the right in the front view, the gaming ball is directed to the guide portion 2510p for the player. At first glance, it can be recognized that the player will be accepted into the second prize opening 2509 when guided, and when the second prize opening 2509 is open, the game ball will be accepted into the second prize opening 2509. It can be recognized as an easy pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when the second prize opening 2509 is in the open state, the driving operation aiming at the attacker flow path 2509a is performed so that the game ball is guided by the guide portion 2510p in the attacker flow path 2509a (right). It is possible to positively perform the hitting), entertain the hitting operation of the game ball, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, as described above, the pachinko machine for playing can be made to recognize at a glance that when the game ball is guided to the guide portion 2510p, it is surely accepted into the second prize opening 2509. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game on the pachinko machine 1 from the player who has selected the above, and it is possible to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the guide portion 2510p is tilted so that the extension line passes through the second large winning opening 2509 which is opened to the right in the front view, the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p is opened. It is possible to directly accept the game ball into the second large winning opening 2509 without contacting it with the opening / closing member 2572, and it is possible to reduce as much as possible the game ball from contacting the second opening / closing member 2572 in the open state. It is possible to prevent the second opening / closing member 2572 from being damaged due to fatigue. On the other hand, when the second large winning opening 2509 is closed, the second opening / closing member 2572 is in a state of standing up substantially vertically, so that the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is relative to the second opening / closing member 2572. Since the contact is made from the lateral direction and the impact acting on the second opening / closing member 257 is smaller than the case where the contact is made from the upper direction, the accumulation of fatigue is reduced and the second opening / closing member 2572 is prevented from being damaged. can do. From these facts, by preventing the second opening / closing member 2572 from being damaged, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the second opening / closing member 2527. It is possible to avoid memorizing and degrading the interest, and it is possible to continue to enjoy the game.

Further, the second opening / closing member 2572 that opens / closes the second special winning opening 2509 is rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is opened / closed when opening / closing the second special winning opening 2509. No matter which of the open position and the closed position is rotated, the outer shape of the second opening / closing member 2572 seen from the player side does not change and only the direction thereof changes, so that the movement of the second opening / closing member 2572 moves. It becomes easier to understand and makes it easier for the player to notice the opening and closing of the second prize opening 2509, so that the player does not feel lost without noticing the opening and closing of the second prize opening 2509. In addition to being able to suppress the decline in interest, it is possible to promptly make the second major winning opening 2509, which is in the open state, perform a game ball driving operation aiming at the second major winning opening 2509. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the lower end side of the second opening / closing member 2527 is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the front-rear direction near the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509, the second opening / closing member 2572 is rotated to the open position. When it is moved, the tip (upper end) side of the second opening / closing member 2572 is likely to rotate in the direction approaching the guide portion 2510p. As a result, the second opening / closing member 2572 is laid between the guiding portion 2510p and the second winning opening 2509, so that the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is transferred from the guiding portion 2510p to the second. (Ii) The opening / closing member 2572 is rolled and accepted into the second large winning opening 2509, and when the game ball is delivered from the guide portion 2510p to the second opening / closing member 2572, the game ball flows down to the second opening / closing member 2572. The impact that acts can be reduced, and the second opening / closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged. Further, when the second opening / closing member 2572 rotates from the open position to the closed position, the guiding portion so as to block the flow path of the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p at the tip (upper end) of the second opening / closing member 2572. Since it rotates in the direction away from 2510p, it is possible to prevent the game ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p from being accepted into the second special winning opening 2509 at this timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of game balls from being accepted into the second prize opening 2509, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the guiding portion 2510p guides the game ball to flow down toward the lower end of the second large winning opening 2509, the game ball is surely secured from the guiding portion 2510p when the second large winning opening 2509 is in the open state. Can be accepted into the second prize opening 2509, and the contact of the game ball with the second opening / closing member 2572 in the open state can be reduced as much as possible, and the second opening / closing member 2572 is damaged due to fatigue. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 2509 is in the closed state, the game ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p comes into contact with the vicinity of the lower end of the second opening / closing member 2572 rotatably supported. The lower end side of the opening / closing member 2527 is in a state of being excellent in impact resistance due to the contact of the game ball, and the second opening / closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged. Therefore, by preventing the second opening / closing member 2572 from being damaged, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the second opening / closing member 2572. It is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered, and the game can be continuously enjoyed.

In addition, the guide unit 2510p guides all the game balls circulating in the attacker passage 2509a toward the second special winning opening 2509, and the second opening / closing member 2572 guides the game when the second large winning opening 2509 is in the open state. When the ball enters the attacker passage 2509a, all the game balls are guided toward the second prize opening 2509 by the guide unit 2510p, so that more game balls are accepted into the second prize opening 2509. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest. Further, when the second large winning opening 2509 is opened, the game ball can be accepted into the second large winning opening 2509 simply by entering the attacker passage 2509a, so that the game ball aimed at the attacker passage 2509a can be received. It is possible to concentrate on the driving operation of the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and losing interest in the game. Furthermore, even in the case of a jackpot that can win a prize in the specific area 2509b in the second large winning opening 2509, the game ball can be easily accepted in the specific area 2509b simply by entering the attacker passage 2509a. In such a big hit, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of driving the game ball aiming at the attacker passage 2509a, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, a game ball that has been hit harder than a predetermined value enters the game area 1100 into the attacker passage 2509a, and the game ball can easily enter the attacker passage 2509a with a simple driving operation (right-handed). Therefore, when the second prize opening 2509 in the attacker passage 2509a is open according to the game state, even an inexperienced player such as a beginner can easily enter the game ball into the attacker passage 2509a. It is possible to accept the game ball into the variable second large winning opening 2509 which is opened and closed by the second opening / closing member 2527 with a high probability, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a reception port to which the privilege is given, directly above the first starting port 2201 where a special advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous may occur due to the acceptance of the game ball. A stage 2506 is arranged upstream of the stage 2506, and it is possible to make the player recognize that when the game ball is released from the stage 2506, it will be accepted into the first starting port 2201 with a high probability, and the stage 2506 is provided. A warp entrance 2503 through which a game ball can enter is opened on the outer periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and when the game ball is entered into the warp entrance 2503, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2506. On the other hand, since it can be recognized at a glance, the player can be made to drive the game ball aiming at the warp entrance 2503 so that the game ball is supplied to the stage 2506. You can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball. Then, when the game ball driven into the game area 1100 enters the warp inlet 2503, it circulates to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 and is supplied to the stage 2506 by the distribution member 2520 on the warp outlet 2505 side. Alternatively, since the game balls are distributed to either side of the discharge port 2508 returned into the game area 1100, the game balls are not necessarily supplied to the stage 2506 even if the game balls enter the warp entrance 2503. It can be attracted to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 where the player's interest can be visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball supplied to the stage 2506 can be enjoyed and the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered. Can be done.

Further, the game ball entered from the warp inlet 2503 by the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 is distributed to either the warp outlet 2505 side supplied to the stage 2506 or the discharge port 2508 side returned to the game area 1100. Therefore, the distribution member 2520 can make the player wonder whether or not the game ball is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side (stage 2506 side), and the player can be thrilled, and the player can move the game ball. It is possible to entertain and prevent the decline in interest.

Further, since the game balls distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the stage 2506, they roll on the stage 2506 in the same manner as the conventional pachinko machine equipped with the stage 2506. In addition to being able to enjoy the movement of the game ball, it is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the game ball is released from the part that is accepted to the first starting port 2201 in the stage 2506 with a high probability. The distribution member 2520 and the stage 2506 make it possible to double entertain the player, and it is possible to entertain a game that has not been available in conventional pachinko machines.

Further, when the game ball released from the stage 2506 is received by the first starting port 2201, the game ball is paid out and a special advantageous game state is generated. A special lottery result lottery is performed and a special advantageous game state can be generated. Since there is a property, it is possible to make the player feel good and to further drive the game ball into the game area 1100, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the game ball supplied to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 reciprocates in the left-right direction by the rolling surface 2521 which extends in the left-right direction and is curved so that both ends are raised, and then reciprocates in the left-right direction from the discharge unit 2522. Since it is discharged and distributed by the ridge 2523 to either the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball reciprocating in the left-right direction. By reciprocating the game ball in the left-right direction, it is possible to confuse whether the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side is distributed. This makes it possible to raise the expectation of distribution to the warp outlet 2505 side (stage 2506 side) and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the game ball entering from the warp inlet 2503 is supplied to one end side in the left-right direction of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520, the game ball is reliably reciprocated in the left-right direction on the rolling surface 2521. It is possible to make the player entertain the movement of the game ball and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Further, since the game ball reciprocates in the left-right direction on the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520, the time from the supply of the game ball to the distribution member 2520 to the distribution can be lengthened. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize how the game balls are distributed, to enjoy the movement of the game balls in the warp passage 2504, and to make it easier to see where the game balls are distributed. It is possible to make the player feel nervous and throbbing, raise the expectation of the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the distribution member 2520, since the probability that the game ball released from the discharge portion 2522 of the rolling surface 2521 is distributed to the warp outlet 2505 side by the ridge portion 2523 is increased, the game that has entered the warp inlet 2503. It is possible to reduce the number of times the player is discouraged because the ball is distributed to the discharge port 2508 side and returned to the game area 1100, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest. At the same time, the game balls are occasionally distributed to the discharge port 2508 side, so that the feeling of excitement for the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member 2520 can be enhanced, and the player is less likely to get bored and the interest is suppressed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball hit aiming at the warp entrance 2503 passes between the warp entrance 2503 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100 without entering the warp entrance 2503, it is guided by the shelf portion 2510f of the center accessory 2500. Then, it enters the entrance 2507, and is guided from the entrance 2507 through the guide passage 2532a to the upper right end side of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520, so that the game ball is distributed to the player. It can be made to seem that there is a possibility that the member 2520 (rolling surface 2521) is supplied to the member 2520 and distributed to the stage 2506 side. Therefore, even if the player is disappointed because the hit game ball does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it is possible to make the player feel as if he / she was rescued by entering the downstream entrance 2507. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

[6. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 154 (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 154 (A), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment is first subjected to various registers and RAM as the process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power-on, and the main control MPU 4100a inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is present, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the RAMs of various registers and the main control MPU 4100a.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a recovery process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random numbers, which are the numbers to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and the special symbol used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. In the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the variable display of the above special symbol. Reach (The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed, or the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all changed in synchronization so that they are the same symbol. The reach random number used in the lottery process to determine whether or not to display), and the symbol random number used in the lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number (No. 1) It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as (one symbol random number, second symbol random number), a random number (ordinary random number) used for a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the door member 2589, and the like.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2201 is started and the second starting port 2587b is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to acquire the reach random number from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is increased by acquiring from the counters that update the reach random number from different random numbers. It may be different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and corresponds to the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach judgment table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

FIG. 154 (B) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control that is periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

As shown in FIG. 154 (B), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2586, the first start port sensor 3422, the second start port sensor 2593, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the general winning port sensor 3421, etc. , Detection signals from various switches are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated in the random number counter. A counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag, first) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a. (Ii) The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the door member 2589 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the driving frequency of the door member 2589 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the specific jackpot gaming state (the jackpot of the specific 1 to the specific 3 described later). The lottery process is executed (so-called time saving state). The number of continuations of the time saving state executed in association with the jackpot differs depending on the high / low probability (high probability / low probability) of the jackpot winning probability of the first and second special lottery when the jackpot is won. When the low-probability table is used (low-probability state) and the jackpots of Specific 1 to 3 are won, 100 time-saving states are given after the jackpot, and a higher-probability table than usual is used (a state in which a higher-probability table than usual is used. If a big hit of specific 1 to specific 3 is won in (high probability state), 165 time saving states are given after the big hit. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters a specific area (V zone) in the second big winning opening 2509 during the big hit game of the specific 1 to the specific 3 (V prize). In order to control the gaming state after the jackpot to a high probability state and to adjust the V winning of the game ball during the jackpot, the second jackpot 2509 (or the second winning slot 2509) is used in a specific round. The opening / closing member 2572) is controlled to open / close differently depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, at the time of the big hit by the specific 1 or the specific 3, the above-mentioned "V long open" is almost certainly realized by performing the above-mentioned "V long open", while at the time of the big hit by the specific 2, the above-mentioned "V short open" is performed. As a result, the possibility of winning a V prize is extremely low (see, for example, FIG. 176). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only within a predetermined period controlled in the time saving state, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened. When the lottery result is successful, the opening time of the door member 2589 is extended to realize such a time saving state.

When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then outputs data such as hit information (16R big hit, 12R big hit, 4R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18. Perform processing.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 responds to the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, and the like as the process of step S19 when they are in the ON state. A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the prize ball is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out the prize ball to the player. On the other hand, when the detection signals of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 are turned on, the prize balls corresponding to those signals are temporarily stored in the count value of the prize ball counter to be predetermined. When the payout condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 390 times after the end of the previous jackpot game state and the jackpot becomes a jackpot), it is stored in the count value of this prize ball counter. A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls is paid out. That is, even if the detection signals of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 are turned on, the prize ball is not immediately paid out to the player, and the predetermined payout condition is satisfied. Until then, prize balls will not be paid out.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of start storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first driven by the second start port sensor 2593. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2587b) (step S31), the second special random number of the second special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter, and this is the first of the RAM. (Ii) The second start port passage process such as storing in the special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the first start port sensor 3422 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2201) (step S33), the first special random number of the first special symbol is set to the above random number. The first start port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the branch sensor valid flag indicating that the branch sensor is enabled is set (step S35), and if the branch sensor valid flag is set, the branch sensor is set as the valid state. The branch sensor passing process (step S40) for monitoring whether or not the game ball passes through the sensor 2620 is executed. In this example, when it is determined that the jackpot is related to the first special symbol (the jackpot of the specific 1 and the specific 2) by performing the above-mentioned passing process by the branch sensor, the first special symbol display 1185 is displayed first. Even after the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed, the jackpot executing flag is not set until the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620, and the jackpot control process (step S41) is not executed. You may do so. Similarly, when it is determined that the jackpot is related to the second special symbol (the jackpot of the specific 3), even after the stop symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186, the above The jackpot execution flag may not be set until the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620, and the jackpot control process (step S41) may not be executed. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the configuration provided with the branch sensor 2620, and when the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with the branch sensor 2620, it is related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot execution flag is set after the jackpot stop symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186, and the jackpot control process (step S41) is executed. You just have to do it.

On the other hand, if the branch sensor valid flag is not set, the jackpot running flag indicating that the jackpot game state is controlled, or the payout appearance (the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is given to the player. It is determined whether or not any of the payout appearance running flags indicating that the payout is being executed) is set (step S36), and the jackpot running flag or the payout appearance running flag is set. If any of the above is set, after executing the jackpot control process (step S41) that controls the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the jackpot executing flag is set, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, If the jackpot game state is a jackpot game state based on the fact that the special symbol has changed and displayed 390 times since the end of the previous jackpot game state and then becomes a jackpot, the count value of the prize ball counter. Instructed to pay out the number of prize balls according to (set the payout execution flag), set the payout appearance execution flag, and the payout appearance is being executed based on the fact that this payout appearance execution flag is set. The payout appearance execution process (step S42) for monitoring whether or not to perform is executed.

In the jackpot control process (step S41), the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is "16R V long open jackpot (specific 1). "Or" 16R V-long open jackpot (specific 3) ", the first jackpot 2102 or the second jackpot 2509 are all in the jackpot game state of specific 1 or specific 3. It will be open for 16 rounds (for example, the 1st prize opening 2102 will be opened in the 1st to 12th and 14th to 16th rounds, and the 2nd prize opening 2509 will be opened in the 13th round). Here, in at least one of the specific rounds in which the second prize opening 2509 is opened, the specific area 2509b is opened for a long time (“V long opening” described in [2-5]). By doing so, the jackpot game that can surely realize the entry of the game ball into the specific area 2509b (V prize) is controlled. Further, in the jackpot control process (step S41), the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is "16R (substantially 15R) V short open jackpot". When the mode suggesting "(Specification 2)" is obtained, the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 is opened for a total of 16 rounds as the big hit game state of the specific 2. At this time, in a specific round (for example, the 13th round) in which the second prize opening 2509 is opened, the specific area 2509b is opened for a short time (“V short opening” described in [2-5]). This controls a big hit game in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area 2509b (V winning) is not allowed. Further, in such a specific 2 big hit game, the specific round opens the big prize opening, but as described above, it is difficult to expect a substantial prize ball to be paid out. The total number of rounds is reduced by one to 15 rounds (actually 15R). Therefore, as a matter of course, the total number of prize balls that can be paid out to the player by the jackpot game of the specific 2 tends to be smaller than that of the jackpot game of the specific 1.

Further, in the jackpot control process (step S41), after the opening control of the first prize opening 2102 or the second prize opening 2509 is performed, each set processing of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. .. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the game is in a high-probability state, and is set based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area 2509b in the second big winning opening 2509 during the big hit game (V winning). When the specified period of the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit elapses, or when the next big hit is won within the specified period, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 164 described later or the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 173 is shown. (Ii) It is reset by the special symbol stop processing.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is reached, and is based on a big hit (specific 1 to 3 big hits) that controls the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. It is set when the jackpot game state is completed. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number of times flag becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 164 or the second special shown in FIG. 173 will be described later. It is reset by the symbol stop processing.

In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state. For example, a jackpot of specific 1 to 3 is won. Depending on the lottery state (high probability state / low probability state) of the special lottery, 165 times if you win the big hit in the high probability state, 100 times if you win the big hit in the low probability state will be the time reduction counter Set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 164 or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 173 (the counter value is returned to "0"). Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to determining the number of time reductions according to the lottery state of the special lottery when the jackpot is won, for example, the jackpots of the specific 1 and the specific 2 (that is, the first symbol random number) If you win the jackpot based on), the number of time reductions will be 100 times, and if you win the specific 3 jackpots (that is, the jackpot based on the second symbol random number), the number of time reductions will be 165 times. And so on.

Further, if neither the jackpot execution flag nor the payout appearance execution flag is set, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. The first special symbol process process (step S38) or the second special symbol process process (step S39) including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol process process (step S39) is configured to be executed with priority over the first special symbol process process (step S38). While the second special symbol process processing is being performed, the first special symbol process processing is not executed (priority change of the second special symbol).

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the first start port sensor 3422 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2201, as shown in FIG. 156. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a new pending state. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S44, each random number thus acquired is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU4100a. Store in.

However, in the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2593 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2587b in the process of step S31, as shown in FIG. 157. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processes of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S54, each random number thus acquired is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU4100a. Store in.

However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38 in FIG. 155). The first special symbol process process (corresponding to steps S80a to S84a shown in FIG. 158) executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process. (Corresponding to steps S80b to S84b shown in FIG. 167) is the same program module, and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different. Therefore, here, the first executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process. Only the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S80a)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. A lottery about the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82a) in which processing is performed
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83a) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. First special symbol stop processing (step S84a) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80a) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 154).

Detailed procedures of each process (steps S80a to S84a) in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 158 are shown in FIGS. 159 to 166. More specifically, the detailed procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80a) is described in FIGS. 159 to 160 (however, FIG. 160 is a first special symbol jackpot determination process included in the first special symbol normal process). The detailed procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a) is shown in FIG. 161. The detailed procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82a) is shown in FIG. 162, and the detailed procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83a) is shown in FIG. 163. The detailed procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84a) is shown in FIGS. 164 to 166 (however, FIG. 165 is the first big hit game start process included in the first special symbol stop process, and FIG. 166 is the first. The jackpot game process is described in detail). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 166 in order.

Further, it was explained that there is a second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 167 as a program module similar to the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 158. Similar to each process in the first special symbol process process, detailed procedures are shown in FIGS. 168 to 175 for each process in the second special symbol process process, but each of these procedures is shown in FIGS. 159 to 159. Since the same program processing is performed only in the procedure shown in 166 and the random numbers and tables used for the determination, the description thereof will be omitted. As step numbers indicating each procedure, the procedure related to the first special symbol is given a subscript "a", and the same procedure related to the second special symbol is given a subscript "b" to indicate the same number of steps. It is clarified that the procedure is the same procedure (for example, step S101a and step S101b are the same procedure except that there is a difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 159, first steps S101a. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S102a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S103a and S104a, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and memorized, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105a, a jackpot determination process (first special symbol jackpot determination process), which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. .. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a) (step S106a), this process ends.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol jackpot determination process (step S105a).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S111a), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 will be in the high-probability time shown in FIG. 176 (A). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S112a) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111a), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 176 (A) is selected (step S113a) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102a of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114a).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 176 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). It is provided with a jackpot determination table at the time of low probability used for, and a jackpot determination table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the three types of first special random numbers have won the jackpot, and the deviation determination indicating that the 1194 types of first special random numbers are out of the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for this, the three types of second special random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won, and the 1194 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that.

Further, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 11 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability match the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 1186 types of first special random numbers match the outlier determination value. When the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 176 (A) is used, the probability that the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is selected (big hit probability) is a little less than four times as high as the low probability. It can be raised to. According to FIG. 176 (A), the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 3/1197 (= 1/399), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 11/1197 (≈1/109). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the high-probability jackpot judgment table referenced for this purpose, 11 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low-probability jackpot judgment table are used as jackpots. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the player has been won and the loss determination value indicating that the 1186 types of second special random numbers are out of order.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S115a). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set, the process is terminated (step S116a), and the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read in step S102a of the first special symbol normal process are read. If it is determined that the result is out of alignment as a result of comparison with the random numbers, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random numbers read in step S102 (step S117a).

The reach determination table is stored in, for example, the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU4100a, and is used when the gaming state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state). It is equipped with a reach determination table for non-time saving, which is used in the case of (high-probability non-time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the reach determination table for a short time, for example, the reach random numbers do not match the reach determination values indicating that all 239 types of reach random numbers reach, but match the reach determination values indicating that they do not reach. Are associated with each other. As described above, in the short time, when it is determined that the reach is out, the reach is not determined, so that the reach flag described later is not set and the reach effect is not executed. Therefore, when the reach is formed in a short time and the reach effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that the reach is a big hit at that time, and the reach effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to set so that the reach effect is not always executed when it is determined that there is a deviation in the time reduction as described above. For example, in the reach determination table in the time reduction. The reach random numbers of several types (for example, six types) may match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached. In such a case, it cannot be recognized as a big hit when the reach effect occurs in a short time, but by setting the reach random number to be the reach less than the normal time (for example, 12 types), when the reach effect occurs, Expectations for big hits can be increased more than usual.

Further, in the non-time saving reach determination table, for example, it matches the reach determination value indicating that 12 types of reach random numbers reach, and matches, for example, the reach determination value indicating that 227 types of reach random numbers do not reach. The above reach random numbers are associated with each other. As described above, in the non-time reduction time, unlike the time reduction time, a reach determination value indicating reach is provided. Therefore, even if the reach is formed in a non-time saving time and the reach effect is executed, it is not possible to recognize whether or not it will be a big hit until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is determined to be out of reach as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102a (step S117a), the variation Sets the reach flag indicating that is the reach, and ends the process (step S119a).

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 161. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105a) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S121a).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S121a, the main control MPU4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102a of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 176 (B). (Step S122a), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S123a). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S121a, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation is stopped (step S124a).

As shown in FIG. 176 (B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random numbers, second symbol random numbers) for each determination result (each jackpot of specific 1 to specific 3). Has been done. In the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the type of jackpot is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
In the 1st to 12th, 14th to 16th rounds, the 1st prize opening 2102 and in the 13th round the 2nd prize 2509 will be for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds or until 8 prizes are counted). By being controlled to the open state, it is controlled to the 16R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easily) enter the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509, and the 13th round is the second. As a round for opening the large winning opening 2509, in particular, "long-time V opening control (V long)" is formed for a long period of time in which the open state of the second opening / closing member 2572 and the operating position of the movable piece 2578b overlap for a long time. By performing "opening)", the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the specific area 2509b (V winning is easy), and the high probability time saving state (the number of time saving is low) after the end of the V winning 16R jackpot gaming state. It is controlled to 100 times at the time of probability and 165 times at the time of high probability), and 16R of the specific 1 won by the first special lottery drawn based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 2201. In the big hits 2.1-12, 14th to 16th rounds, the first big winning opening 2102 is controlled to be open for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds or until 8 winning counts), and in the 13th round, the second By controlling the big winning opening 2509 to be open for a short time, it is controlled to be a big hit game state of all 16Rs in which a game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509, especially 13 rounds. The eye is not only to shorten the opening period of the second opening / closing member 2527, but also to maintain a state in which the open state of the second opening / closing member 2572 and the period in which the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position do not overlap. By performing "V open control (V short open)", the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific area 2509b (V winning is difficult), and the 16R (substantially 15R) big hit that does not win the V. After the end of the game state, the time is controlled to a low probability time reduction state (the number of time reductions is 100 times at the low probability and 165 times at the high probability), based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 2201. Specific 2 15R (actual 16R) jackpots won by the first special lottery 3.1-12, 14th to 16th rounds are the first big winning opening 2102, and the 13th round is the second big winning opening 2509 By being controlled in the open state for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds or until the time of counting 8 prizes), a game ball can enter the first prize opening 2102 and the second prize opening 2509 (easy). 16R jackpot game state and 13 rounds The first round is a round for opening the second prize opening 2509, and in particular, a period in which the open state of the second opening / closing member 2572 and the operating position of the movable piece 2578b overlap for a long time is formed for a long time. By performing "V open control (V long open)", it is controlled to a big hit game state in which a game ball can enter a specific area 2509b (V winning is easy), and a high probability time is shortened after the end of the V winning 16R big hit game state. It is controlled to a state (the number of time reductions is 100 times when the probability is low and 165 times when the probability is high), and is drawn by the second special lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2587b. One of the three types of jackpots, the 16R jackpot of the specific 3 to be won, is decided.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the judgment values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the determination value is distributed only to the 16R jackpot of the specific 1 or the 16R (substantially 15R) jackpot of the specific 2. Is set, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set only for the 16R jackpot of the specific 3.

In this example, only in the case of the big hit of the specific area 2, "short-time opening of the specific area (V short opening)" is set as the opening control of the specific area 2509b when the second big winning opening 2509 is opened, and other than that. In the case of a big hit (big hit of specific 1 or specific 3), "long-time opening of specific area (V long opening)" is set as opening control of specific area 2509b when the second big winning opening 2509 is opened. A jackpot associated with "opening a specific area for a short time" cannot be expected to enter a game ball (V prize) in a specific area 2509b, while a jackpot associated with "opening a specific area for a long time" is specified. As described above, the game ball is surely entered into the area 2509b (V prize), and the V prize cannot be expected only in the case of the specific 2 big hit, and the game state after the big hit is a low probability state. While being controlled to the "unfavorable jackpot game state (unfavorable jackpot)", in other jackpots, the game ball wins a V and the game state after the jackpot becomes a high probability state "advantageous jackpot game state (advantageous jackpot)" ) ”. Therefore, in this example, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, at the time of a jackpot, it is sorted into a jackpot associated with either "short-time opening of a specific area" or "long-time opening of a specific area". On the other hand, the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol has a feature that when a jackpot is hit, it is always sorted to the jackpot associated with "opening a specific area for a long time". With reference to FIG. 176 (B), the specific probability of being assigned to the disadvantageous jackpot of "opening a specific area for a short time" in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol is 100/200 (= 50%). ..

Although the details will be described later, in the non-time saving state, the door member 2589 is not driven even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b does not occur, and by hitting left, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2201 occurs, and the second special Unless there is a reserved ball of the symbol, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is executed, and a jackpot related to the first special symbol (a jackpot of specific 1 or specific 2) occurs. become. On the other hand, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the door member 2589 is driven by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2301. Therefore, in the short time state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 2587b by hitting right, and it is possible to expect the occurrence of a big hit (a big hit of the specific 3) related to the second special symbol. Even in the time saving state, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. In the stop processing of the second special symbol based on the second special lottery (second special symbol stop symbol setting processing), the stop symbol according to the type of jackpot is similarly determined as the mode when the second special symbol is stopped. However, in the case of the above example, since there is only one type of jackpot by the second special symbol of the specific 3, in the actual processing of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol according to the type of jackpot is used. The stop symbol according to the big hit may be selected instead of the decision of.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125a, any of these lottery results (type of jackpot, missed reach, or missed) is instructed. A judgment result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the instruction)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. After that, as the process of step S126a, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82a). The peripheral control MPU4140a starts the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed and controlled as described above. The order of stop display of each decorative symbol is not limited to the above order, and when a specific variation pattern command is selected, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 may be displayed and controlled.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU4140a is one of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. , When the jackpot of the specific 1 is specified, it is determined to be the specific 1 jackpot symbol (for example, a combination of the same symbols by the odd-numbered symbols among the symbols of "1" to "9"), and the jackpot of the specific 2 is specified. In the case, it is determined to be a specific 2 big hit symbol (for example, a combination of the same symbol by an even number symbol among the symbols of "1" to "9"), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (reach effect). The determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (at the end of). In this way, when the combination of the same decorative symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 stops fluctuating, the player decides which of the specified 1 and the specified 2 is a big hit from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols. Is determined, and it is possible to predict whether or not the time is controlled to a high probability time saving state after the end of each jackpot game state. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in at least a part of the case where the specific 1 big hit is won, the specific 2 big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 instead of the specific 1 big hit symbol. In such a case, it is necessary to display whether or not the specific 2 big hits are made at the start of the big hit, and to teach that the specific 1 big hit was won during the big hit game. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect of promotion to a more advantageous jackpot (from specific 2 to specific 1), and it is possible to entertain the player.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and is specified 3 out of the jackpots related to the second special symbol from the received determination result notification command. When the jackpot is specified, it is determined to be the specified 3 jackpot symbols (combination of the same symbols by any of the symbols "1" to "9"), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (reach). At the end of the effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same decorative symbols as the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 stops fluctuating, the player determines from the stop symbols of the decorative symbols that it is a jackpot of the specific 3 and specifies it. After the end of the jackpot game state of 3, it can be expected to be controlled to the high probability time saving state.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. If the design (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same, but the left and right decorative symbols are the same) is determined and the deviation is specified, the missing symbol (combination of decorative symbols that are not the same, but the left and right decorations) is not accompanied by reach. The symbols are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a jackpot flag (No. 1). 1 Check if the special symbol jackpot determination process step S116a) is set (step S141a), and if the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot determined in step S123a of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process. A variation pattern table at the time of a big hit is selected according to the type and the current gaming state (step S142a). If the jackpot flag is not set in step S141a, the main control MPU4100a confirms whether the reach flag (see step S119a of the first special symbol jackpot determination process) is set (step S143a), and the reach flag. If is set, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach loss according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144a), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal loss (reach) is set. In the case of “outside without executing the effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of offset is selected (step S145a). Here, FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern selection table), and FIG. 177 (A) shows an example of a fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit selected in step S142a. FIG. 177 (B) shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of reach loss selected in step S144a.

Next, in step S146a, the main control MPU4100a compares the fluctuation pattern table selected in step S142a with the fluctuation random numbers read in step S102a of the first special symbol normal processing, so that the distribution set in the fluctuation pattern table is sorted. The variation pattern to be executed (for example, variation patterns 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 177) is determined based on the above. Then, the main control MPU4100a sets a variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 that the determined variation pattern is started, and starts the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. (Step S147a). Further, the main control MPU4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S148a). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display 1185, the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

Then, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149a. This process ends when the update is performed.

The series of processes described above is the first variation pattern setting process, but in the following, the variation pattern table used in the first variation pattern setting process, the distribution of lottery effects associated with the selection of the variation pattern, and the like (FIG. 171). The same applies to the fluctuation pattern table and the like used in the second fluctuation pattern setting process, which will be described later with reference to the above), and then the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 176 (B) are supplemented. The characteristics of the jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

A plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. For example, referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 177 (A), the fluctuation pattern 1 in which the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, the fluctuation pattern 2 in which the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, and 120 seconds. It can be seen that the fluctuation pattern 3 in which the fluctuation time of is set is stored. Therefore, the main control MPU4100a sets the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing step S102a (or FIG. 168) from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing with the variable random number read in step S102b) of the second special symbol normal processing described later while referring to the table, and acquiring the variable time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the special symbol Determine the variation pattern of (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

In addition, regarding the variation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach loss) in this example, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, the same as the variation pattern table at the time of big hit, are also used. A plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on the second symbol random number) and are stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a. In the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the fluctuation random number. It is memorized in the form of being associated with each of them. For example, referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of reach loss shown in FIG. 177 (B), the fluctuation pattern 4 in which the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, the fluctuation pattern 5 in which the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set, and 120 seconds. It can be seen that the fluctuation pattern 6 in which the fluctuation time of is set is stored.

Based on the fluctuation time and distribution of each fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 177 (A) and 177 (B), the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 that can be selected at the time of a big hit is "93.5 seconds". On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns 4 to 6 that can be selected at the time of reach loss is "13.6 seconds". That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the fluctuation pattern of the longer fluctuation time is set more easily to be selected at the time of big hit than at the time of reach loss. In other words, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation for the big hit. It is set to be high.

Further, in this example, in step S146a, when the fluctuation pattern to be executed is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit or the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach loss, the reach effect is produced when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the fluctuation is displayed. Since (also referred to as "lottery effect" or "winning effect") is executed, the mode type of the reach effect is determined based on the determined variation pattern. In this example, the description will be continued assuming that the main control MPU4100a performs the process of determining the mode type of the reach effect (lottery effect). For example, the peripheral control MPU4140a performs the process based on the variation pattern command notified from the main control MPU4100a. May be done.

Here, the determination of the reach effect (lottery effect) based on the fluctuation pattern will be described with a specific example. FIG. 178 is an example of a lottery effect distribution table for distributing the reach effect (lottery effect) based on the fluctuation pattern.

In FIG. 178, the reach types to be executed are divided for each fluctuation pattern (variation patterns 1 to 6) selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table. Specifically, the fluctuation patterns 1 and 4 are associated with "normal reach", the fluctuation patterns 2 and 5 are associated with "medium boss battle reach", and the fluctuation patterns 3 and 6 are associated with "last boss battle". Corresponds to "reach". Since different fluctuation times (10 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds) are set for each fluctuation pattern, it is preferable that different reach types are associated with each fluctuation pattern in this way. Here, "Middle Boss Battle Reach" and "Last Boss Battle Reach" are super reach productions in which the expectation (reliability) for a big hit is set higher than that of "Normal Reach". It is a battle reach production that displays the battle production with. Among the super reach productions, "Last Boss Battle Reach" is set with higher expectations for big hits than "Medium Boss Battle Reach".

Then, each variation pattern is assigned to one of the production numbers according to the distribution in the corresponding reach type, and the reach production (lottery production) is performed with the production content (lottery production content) corresponding to the distributed production number. Will be executed. According to the lottery effect distribution table of FIG. 178, in the case of the normal reach of the fluctuation patterns 1 and 4, it is distributed into "normal stop", "high-speed bitter stop stop", and "slow stop" according to the stop mode of the decorative symbol. .. In the case of the fluctuation patterns 2, 3, 5, and 6, in the case of the middle boss battle reach or the last boss battle reach, "medium boss + weak" depending on the combination of the type of enemy character in the battle reach and the type of weapon used by the ally. Weapons are sorted as "Weapons", "Medium Boss + Medium Weapons", and "Last Boss + Strong Weapons".

FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the degree of expectation for each lottery effect. FIG. 179 shows the degree of expectation for the jackpot for each “content of the lottery effect” of FIG. 178. With reference to FIG. 179, as described above, it can be seen that the “medium boss battle reach” and the “last boss battle reach” have higher expectations for big hits than the “normal reach”. Also, looking at the contents of the lottery production of "Medium Boss Battle Reach" and "Last Boss Battle Reach" classified as Super Reach, "Medium Weapon" and even "Strong Weapon" are more big hits than "Weapon". It can be seen that expectations are high.

In addition, in the lottery effect distribution table of FIG. 178, it is shown that the fluctuation patterns 2, 3, 5, and 6 are subject to "look-ahead generation". When "pre-reading generation" is performed, a predetermined pre-reading determination process (pre-reading determination) is performed, and a predetermined effect (pre-reading effect) is executed based on the result of the determination process (pre-reading result).

The specific flow of "look-ahead" in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described as an example. First, the main control MPU4100a uses various random numbers based on various random numbers (step S44 in FIG. 156 and step S54 in FIG. 157) stored in the first start port passage process or the second start port passage process. Prior to the "lottery" (for example, a big hit lottery, a probability variation lottery, and determination of a variable display pattern), a preliminary determination process (pre-reading determination) for determining the lottery result of the lottery in advance is performed. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S44 and S54 and the advance determination table, and the advance determination table is the same table as the table used for the "predetermined lottery" using the random numbers. Is. In the advance judgment process, by comparing the random number with the advance judgment table, the lottery result (big hit success / failure, big hit type, variable display pattern, etc.) when a lottery using the random number is performed is determined. Will be done.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a command indicating the determination result (look-ahead result) of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140. As a result, the peripheral control unit 4140 that has received the command can obtain the determination result (look-ahead result) of the lottery result of the lottery before the above-mentioned "predetermined lottery" is executed. An effect that reflects the command can be displayed before the above-mentioned "predetermined lottery" is executed. Such an effect is called a look-ahead effect, and for example, when it is determined in advance that a big hit will be made in a "predetermined lottery", in a change (preliminary change) executed before the change that becomes the big hit. , A precursor effect that can suggest the jackpot can be displayed as a look-ahead effect. When the "middle boss reach" or "last boss reach" shown in FIG. 178 is performed, such "look-ahead" is performed, and the look-ahead effect is displayed in the pre-variation before the fluctuation display of the fluctuation. Above, the super reach appears in the fluctuation. However, the execution of the look-ahead or the execution of the look-ahead effect may be performed only in a state in which a special random number is stored in addition to the fluctuation (a state in which there is a pending fluctuation).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a reach effect without pre-reading, but the reach effect with pre-reading has a higher expectation for a big hit than the reach effect without pre-reading. It is preferable to set it. For example, when the above "middle boss battle reach" or "last boss battle reach" is selected, it is always said that "look-ahead occurs" according to FIG. 178, but "middle boss battle reach" or "last boss" without pre-reading "Battle Reach" may be additionally set with a lower production expectation than each reach production accompanied by pre-reading. Specifically, for example, the lottery effect selected for the variation pattern 3 in FIG. 178 is the last boss battle reach (any of the effect numbers 7 to 9) in which the look-ahead determination is performed, but in addition to this, the look-ahead By adding the last boss battle reach (temporarily the effect numbers 7a to 9a) that is not performed, it is possible to set the option of the reach effect (lottery effect) without pre-reading. Then, the production expectation of the lottery production corresponding to each of the production numbers 7a to 9a is set lower than the production expectation of the lottery production corresponding to each of the production numbers 7 to 9 (see FIG. 179). Therefore, the expectation for the big hit can be higher when the reach effect with pre-reading is selected.

The preceding judgment table is the same as the table used for the above-mentioned "predetermined lottery", but at least a part of the contents of the preceding judgment table is the contents of the table used for the above "predetermined lottery". May be different from. In addition, a specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described in detail later in [9].

Next, the characteristics of the jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, 50% of the jackpots (first special jackpots) by the first special lottery are "disadvantageous jackpots" associated with "short-time opening of a specific area" (specification 1). The jackpot) and the remaining 50% are "advantageous jackpots" associated with "opening a specific area for a long time" (specific 2 jackpots), while the jackpots by the second special lottery (second special jackpot) , 100% becomes an "advantageous jackpot" associated with "opening a specific area for a long time" (specific 3 jackpots), so the second special jackpot is better than the first special jackpot from the viewpoint of the type of jackpot. Also has an advantage.

To summarize the superiority of the second special jackpot, in the case of the second special jackpot (specifically, the specific three jackpots), the V prize is surely performed in the jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state is After the end, it is controlled to the high probability time saving state again. In particular, when the second special jackpot is won in the high-probability time-saving state, the number of time-savings after the end of the jackpot is set to be large (in the example shown in FIG. 176, the number of time-savings is in the high-probability state. At the time of winning, it will be 165 times, which is more than 100 times at the time of winning in a low probability state), and there is a high expectation that it will be possible to win the second special jackpot again after that, so it is possible to maintain a high so-called continuation rate. It has become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the second special jackpot has a stronger advantage than the first special jackpot, it can be said that the time-saving state in which the game is advanced by right-handed is an advantageous gaming state for the player. On the other hand, since the first starting port 2201a is provided on the path through which the game ball can flow down when hitting right (see, for example, FIG. 188), right-handing is performed during the big hit game and in an advantageous state. Since at least a part of the right-handed gaming ball is accepted by the first starting port 2201a regardless of the player's intention, even if only the second starting port 2587b is aimed at, the first starting port 2201a It is difficult to avoid accepting game balls to the game.

In such a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is considered that a malicious player tries to enter a game ball only into the second starting port 2587b due to an illegal game or the like and aims only at a big hit by the second special lottery. Therefore, even if only the second starting port 2587b is aimed at, it is possible to avoid the possibility that a part of the game balls (spilled balls) that were not accepted by the second starting port 2587b will be accepted by the first starting port 2201b. difficult. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 always goes through the big hit game before being controlled to the advantageous state, and in the big hit game, the privilege is given by right-handed (payment of the prize ball to the big winning opening). In this big hit game, the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a, is discharged to the first big winning opening 2102 side of the attacker unit 2100 by the guiding member 2584, and then is opened. However, since the first starting port 2201b is located in front of the first winning opening 2102, a part of the game ball heading for the first winning opening 2102 is the first starting port 2201b. It is impossible for the player to operate and adjust the acceptance of the game. Then, when the game ball is received at the first starting port 2201b during the big hit game, the first special symbol is changed in the subsequent advantageous state. Therefore, in any case, the first special random number is generated in the advantageous state. It is difficult to prevent memory (variation hold) from being performed. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the priority change of the second special symbol, and therefore, while the time saving state continues, only the change display of the second special symbol by the second special lottery is performed. It is possible to execute. However, the period controlled by the time saving state is limited (specifically, the time saving state ends when the next big hit cannot be won even after the specified number of times of 100 times or 165 times has passed). Therefore, after the end of the time saving state in which it becomes difficult to insert the game ball into the second starting port 2587b, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the first special random number stored on hold. .. That is, it can be expected that the player can be prevented from continuing to aim only at the second special lottery, the illegal game of the player can be prevented, and the proper game can be promoted to enjoy the original playability of the game machine.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first first steps S171a. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82a) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172a), the process proceeds to step S173a. That is, in the process of step S173a, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84a).

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 164, first steps S181a. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1185 is performed, and the first special on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Stopping the symbol A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182a).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter in which the time reduction flag is set and the number of times the time reduction state is set is set is "0". (Step S183a). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S184a), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S185a). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset (step S186a). When it is determined that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0" in the process of step S183a, or when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not "0" in the process of step S185a. At that point, the process proceeds to step S187a.

Next, as the process of step S187a, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 counts up the counter value of the fluctuation number counter in which the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot game state is counted. The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state, and is counted up in step S187a every time the variation display of the special symbol is executed after the end of the jackpot game state. However, when the next big hit occurs regardless of whether the counter value has reached "390" (the number of times the special symbol has been changed and displayed 390 times), it is reset by the payout appearance execution process shown in FIG. 186, which will be described later. (Return the counter value to "0").

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 confirms whether or not the flag indicating the jackpot by the first special symbol is set (step S188a). When the big hit flag by the first special symbol is set (YES in step S188a), the game on the second special symbol side is temporarily suspended in order to avoid the occurrence of duplicate big hits by the second special symbol. The "pause flag of the second special symbol" indicating that the state to be stopped is turned on (step S189a). Then, the pre-processing for starting the big hit game (first big hit game) by the first special symbol is executed (step S190a), and then the processing of the first big hit game is executed (step S191a). The detailed procedure of step S190a will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, and the detailed procedure of step S191a will be described later with reference to FIG. 166. If the process of step S191a is completed, or if the flag indicating the jackpot by the first special symbol is not set in step S188a, the process proceeds to step S192a and the first special symbol process flag is set to the initial value. The process is updated so that the process shifts to a certain first special symbol normal process, and the series of processes shown in FIG. 164 is completed.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first big hit game start process (step S190a).

As shown in FIG. 165, in the first jackpot game start process, the main control MPU4100a first sets a timer (first jackpot start interval timer) that measures the pre-start interval of the jackpot game as the process of step S201a. Determine if it is already done. As a result, when the first jackpot start interval timer is not yet set, the condition device is operated as the process of step S202a, and the time saving function is activated as the process of step S203a and step S204a. If there is (YES in step S203a), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations are completed, when the first jackpot start interval timer is set and the first jackpot interval start command is set as the processing of steps S205a and S206a in order to start the pre-start interval of the jackpot game. , This process is terminated once.

The first jackpot interval start command set in the process of step S206a is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the first jackpot start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer has already been set in the process of step S201a each time the interrupt process is performed. In the process of the next step S207a, it is determined whether or not the first jackpot start interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. .. Then, in the process of step S207a, as long as it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S207a). Each time the first big hit game start process is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S209a.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, it was determined that in the processing of step S811a, the first jackpot start interval timer became 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game had elapsed. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game, the process is updated to the first jackpot game process (step S208a), and the series of processes shown in FIG. 165 is completed.

The time length of the first jackpot start interval timer can be set according to the type of jackpot symbol (type determined by the first symbol random number).

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first jackpot game process (step S191a).

As shown in FIG. 166, in the first jackpot game process, the main control MPU4100a first indicates that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress as the process of step S211a. Determines whether the jackpot game execution flag is on. As a result, when the first big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, the process of step S212a is performed in order to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509. As an opening mode (number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round) according to the type of jackpot.

For example, in the case of a specific 1 16R jackpot, "16 times" is set as the number of rounds. As a more detailed set content, the number of rounds opened by the 1st Grand Prize 2102 is 1 to 12, 14 to 16 rounds "15 times", and the number of rounds opened by the 2nd Grand Prize 2509 is 13 rounds "1 time". Is set like this. Further, as the opening time of each round, for example, "28.5 seconds" is uniformly set, and as the maximum number of winnings in each round, for example, "8" is uniformly set. In addition to this, for example, in the opening round of the second big winning opening 2509 in the 13th round, the control of V long opening may be additionally set. In addition, a plurality of types of jackpots may be prepared, and the opening time and the maximum number of winnings in each round may be different.

After the execution mode of the jackpot game is set in this way, as the processing of steps S213a and S214a, the first jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress is turned on. This process is temporarily terminated when the operation is performed and the first jackpot start command is set.

That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, every time the interrupt process is performed, the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress in the process of step S211a. The determination will be made, and in the process of the next step S215a, it will be determined whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted. Then, in the process of step S215a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been digested yet, that is, it is in the middle of the control related to the execution of the jackpot game (NO in step S215a). Each time the first big hit game process is performed, control according to the set opening pattern is executed as the process of step S216a. As a result, every time the above interrupt process is performed (for example, every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the opening / closing member of each large winning opening is updated (managed) through the process of step S216a. As a result, a big hit game in which the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2102 or second big winning opening 2509) opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit is realized.

Then, while such control is being performed, in the process of step S215a, it is determined that the set number of rounds has been digested, that is, all the controls related to the execution of the jackpot game have been completed. (YES in step S215a), each process (step S217a, step S218a, step S225a, step S226a, step S227a, etc.) for generating the end interval of the jackpot game is performed.

That is, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the timer for timing the end interval of the jackpot game (first jackpot end interval timer) is already set (step S217a). As a result, if the first jackpot end interval timer is not yet set, the first jackpot end interval timer is set as the processing of steps S226a and S227a in order to start the end interval of the jackpot game, and the first jackpot end interval timer is set. When the 1 jackpot interval end command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

The first jackpot interval end command set in the process of step S227a is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the first jackpot end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer has already been set in the process of step S217a each time the interrupt process is performed. In the process of step S218a, it is determined whether or not the first jackpot end interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the end interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. Then, in the process of step S218a, as long as it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S218a). Each time the first jackpot game process is performed, the first jackpot end interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S225a.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S218a, when it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the end interval of the jackpot game has elapsed. , Each process (step S219a to step S224a) for ending the big hit game will be performed.

That is, the main control MPU4100a first operates the first jackpot game execution flag, which indicates that the control related to the execution of the jackpot game is already in progress, to the off state as the process of step S219a. Next, if the result of the first special symbol lottery satisfies the condition for operating the time saving function (YES in step S220a), the time saving function is activated to control the transition to the time saving game state (YES). Step S221a).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the game on the second special symbol side should be paused in view of the fact that there is no possibility that the big hit game will be duplicated on the second special symbol side. The above-mentioned pause flag indicating that the state is in the state is turned off (step S222a). After that, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S223a), the process is updated to the first special symbol normal process (step S224a), and the series of processes shown in FIG. 166 is completed.

According to such a big hit game process, the corresponding big prize opening (first big prize opening 2102 or second big winning opening) until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step S215a. 2509) will be repeatedly opened in an opening mode (step S216a) according to the type of jackpot, and eventually a prize ball according to the type of jackpot can be obtained by the player.

The first jackpot start command set in step S214a of FIG. 166 is one of the commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010, and the jackpot start commands are individually according to the type of jackpot. It is prepared. The effect according to the type of jackpot instructed by such a jackpot start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED, the speaker 130, 222, 262, and the like.

As described above, the detailed procedure of each process (steps S80a to S84a) in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 158 has been described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 166. As described above, there is a second special symbol process process for the second special symbol as well as the first special symbol process process for the first special symbol.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second special symbol process process (step S39 in FIG. 155). The detailed description is omitted because it is almost the same as the first special symbol process process, but in FIG. 167, the second special symbol normal process (step S80b), the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81b), and the second The variation pattern setting process (step S82b), the second special symbol variation process (step S83b), and the second special symbol stop process (step S84b) are shown.

The detailed procedure of each of these processes is shown in FIGS. 168 to 175. Since the processing of these figures is almost the same as that of FIGS. 159 to 166 described above, detailed description of each of these figures will be omitted. Showing only the correspondence, FIG. 168 shows the detailed procedure of the second special symbol normal processing (step S80b), and FIG. 169 shows the detailed procedure of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing. .. Further, FIG. 170 shows a detailed procedure of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81b), and FIG. 171 shows a detailed procedure of the second variation pattern setting process (step S82b). The detailed procedure of the second special symbol variation processing (step S83b) is shown. Further, FIG. 173 shows a detailed procedure of the second special symbol stop process (step S84b), and FIG. 174 shows a detailed procedure of the second big hit game start process of the second special symbol stop process. , FIG. 175 shows a detailed procedure of the second big hit game process in the second special symbol stop process.

Further, FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining various tables used at the time of jackpot determination and symbol determination, as described above in connection with the explanation of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 161). , FIG. 176 (A) shows an example of a jackpot determination table, and FIG. 176 (B) shows an example of a symbol determination table.

Further, FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern selection table), FIG. 177 (A) shows an example of a fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 177 (B) shows a time of reach loss. An example of the fluctuation pattern selection table of is shown. Further, FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining the distribution of the reach effect (lottery effect) selected based on the fluctuation pattern, and shows an example of the lottery effect distribution table. Further, FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the degree of expectation for each lottery effect. These FIGS. 177 to 179 have been described above in relation to the description of the first variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 162), but the specific contents of the production and the like will be described in detail later.

Further, FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a control example of the second large winning opening and the like in which avoidance of V winning can be adjusted, and this is a description regarding the second attacker unit 2570 (see FIGS. 146 to 148). ) As described above.

FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2586 is on and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2585a, as shown in FIG. 181, the main As the process of step S802, the main control MPU4100a of the control board 4100 first executes a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. To do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the door member 2589 rotates to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2587b. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 154).

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2586 is on and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2585a in the process of step S801, as shown in FIG. 182, the above As the process of step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of held normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to put the variable display control of the normal symbols into a new hold state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of step S821. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S822, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 4100a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2585a are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state of the main control board 4100 is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S825), a non-time-saving hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state). It is provided with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used when the game state is non-time-saving (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure hit. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the out-of-order judgment value indicating that the outlier is obtained. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a, the game ball is always won by hitting the normal drawing, and the door member 2589 rotates to move the game ball to the second starting port 2587b. Acceptance is controlled to be possible.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. In this way, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a, the door member 2589 does not win because it does not win in the normal drawing, so the second starting port 2587b is rotated. There is no control over the acceptance of game balls into the door.

When the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol hit as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when the result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is determined to be out of order, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a hit, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extremely long. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is won, the second starting port 2587b is controlled by an opening / closing pattern in which the second starting port 2587b is closed in an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). .. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit is extremely high, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second starting port 21 is in the open state. Because of the long time, it is much easier to win the game ball to the second starting port 2587b, and it is more efficient to aim the second starting port 2587b than the first starting port 2201. You can win a prize. In the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always a hit, and the second starting port 2587b is aimed at. Also, the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 2587b.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2587b is aimed at, the game ball cannot be won by the second starting port 2587b, so that the first starting port 2201 is used. The game ball must be launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball wins a prize. Further, in the game area 1100 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball hits the obstacle nails. By touching the game ball, various movements are given to the game ball so that it flows down. Therefore, even if a game ball is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2201, the first starting port 2201 is not always won, and the first starting port 2201 is won. The missing game ball is discharged to the outside from the out port 1151 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to more efficiently win the game ball by aiming at the second start port 2587b than at the first start port 2201, so that the game ball can be won by the second start port 2587b. Must shoot a game ball (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the player can win the prize. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second starting port 2587b is opened, if a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2587b, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a. The game ball has come to win a prize in the second starting port 2587b with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and the non-time saving state is being controlled. Compared with the first starting port 2201 in the above, the game ball comes to win the second starting port 2587b extremely efficiently.

Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 4, when passing through the gate portion 2585a, there is an extremely high probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit, and the variation display of the normal symbol will be displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the open state of the second starting port 2587b is long, so that the game ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2587b, and further, the game is played in the second starting port 2587b. When the ball wins, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-time saving state. It is possible to digest the fluctuation display control of the symbol (holding the fluctuation display control of the special symbol). That is, when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the big hit is achieved again in a short time by hitting the game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2587b. It is possible to control the jackpot game state and expect the acquisition of many game balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the number of game balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second start port 2587b is, for example, one, the game ball to the second start port 2587b. Even if the prizes occur frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

184 and 185 are diagrams for explaining the sub-main process executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010, but the sub-main process will be described in the next section.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the payout appearance execution process (step S42).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S311 that the payout appearance execution flag is not set, as shown in FIG. 186, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is the process of step S312. First, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the jackpot game state. Specifically, in the jackpot control process (step S41), the jackpot game state is executed when either the jackpot related to the first special symbol or the jackpot related to the second special symbol is reached, and at the end of the jackpot game state. Judge whether or not.

Next, as the process of step S312, when it is determined that the jackpot game state has ended, as the process of step S313, whether the counter value of the fluctuation number counter exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, "390 times"). Judge whether or not. Then, if this counter value exceeds a predetermined number of times, the payout execution flag is set, the payout appearance execution flag is set (step S314), the payout appearance payout execution is started (step S315), and the payout appearance payout is issued. The production time of is set in the production timer (step S316). In this way, it is determined that it is the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot game state becomes a jackpot after the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number since the end of the previous jackpot gaming state. When it is determined that the game is in the jackpot game state based on the above, it is determined that the payout execution flag is set in step S314 and the payout execution flag is set in step S307 of the prize ball processing described later. In step S308 of the prize ball processing, the prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number counter are paid out to the player. In addition, it is determined that it is the end of the big hit game state, and it is based on the fact that the big hit game state becomes a big hit after the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the end of the previous big hit game state. If it is determined that the player is in the jackpot game state, the player is notified that the prize balls corresponding to the prize ball counter will be paid out, following the production according to the jackpot game state. However, by setting the pay-out appearance execution flag in step S314 and setting the pay-out appearance effect time in the effect timer in step S316, the pay-out appearance execution flag is set in step S311 and step S36 of the special symbol process processing. It will be determined that it has been set, and the payout appearance will be executed until the production timer reaches "0" in step S318 described later. If it is determined in the process of step S312 that it is not the end of the big hit game state, the big hit game state is being executed, and it is not the timing when the prize balls corresponding to the prize ball counter are paid out to the player. Since it is determined that, the process ends at that point.

Further, when it is determined that the process of the big hit game state is the end of the process of step S312, regardless of whether or not the processes of steps S314 to S316 are executed, the process of step S317 is the change number counter. This process ends when the counter value is reset (returned to "0"). In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game state is at the end, the jackpot game state becomes a jackpot after the end of the previous jackpot game state and before the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number. Even if the prize ball corresponding to the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player due to the big hit game state based on the fact, the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is always reset and the big hit game state. It is configured to count up (“+1”) every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed from the state where the fluctuation count counter is reset (“0”) after the end of.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S311 that the payout appearance execution execution flag is set, it is determined as the process of step S318 whether or not the effect timer is "0". Then, if the effect timer is "0", it is assumed that it is the timing to end the execution of the payout appearance, and as the process of step S319, this process ends when the payout appearance execution flag is reset. If it is determined in the process of step S318 that the effect timer is not "0", the process ends at that point.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the prize ball processing (step S19).

Now, in the process of step S301, the detection signal of any one of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 is in the ON state, and the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b When it is determined that the game ball has won any of the prizes, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as the process of step S302, first, the first start port sensor 3422, The prize balls corresponding to the detection signal of the second start port sensor 2593 are added to the count value of the prize ball count counter. Specifically, when the detection signal of the first start port sensor 3422 is turned on, "3" is added to the count value of the prize ball counter, and the detection signal of the second start port sensor 2593 is turned on. Then, "1" is added to the count value of the prize ball counter. That is, even if a game ball wins in either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, the prize ball is only added to the count value of the prize ball counter, and the prize ball is not immediately paid out. ing. In the process of step S301, none of the detection signals of the first start port sensor 3422 and the second start port sensor 2593 is in the ON state, and the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b are not in the ON state. If it is determined that the game ball has not won any of the prizes, the process proceeds to step S303 at that time.

Next, the main control MPU4110a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is in the ON state as the process of step S303, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 2301. Judge whether or not. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is in the ON state, a payout control command is issued to the payout control board 4110 so that the prize ball corresponding to the detection signal is paid out to the player. Output (step S304). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out the prize ball to the player. Specifically, when the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is turned on, 10 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. If it is determined in the process of step S303 that the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is not in the ON state and the game ball has not won in the general winning opening 2301, step S305 at that time. Move to the processing of.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the detection signal of any of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is in the ON state as the process of step S305, that is, the first. It is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in either the first major winning opening 2102 or the second major winning opening 2509. Then, when it is determined that any of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is in the ON state, the prize balls corresponding to those detection signals are paid out to the player. A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 (step S306). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out the prize ball to the player. Specifically, when any of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is turned on, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. In the process of step S303, neither the detection signal of the first count sensor 2111 nor the detection signal of the second count sensor 2578 is in the ON state, and any of the first prize opening 2102 and the second prize opening 2509. If it is determined that the game ball has not won a prize, the process proceeds to step S307 at that time.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the payout execution flag is set as the process of step S307. Then, when it is determined that the payout execution flag is set, it is determined that the jackpot game state has been executed when the jackpot has been reached, and the jackpot game state is the end of the previous jackpot game state. Since it is determined that the game is in a big hit game state based on the fact that the special symbol has been changed and displayed 390 times afterwards, the prize balls corresponding to the prize ball counter will be paid out to the player. A payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 (step S308), and when the payout execution flag is reset (step S309), this process ends. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744, and pays out the prize ball to the player. If it is determined in the process of step S307 that the payout execution flag is not set, it is determined that the timing is not after the execution of the jackpot game state, or at the end of the jackpot game state. However, it is determined that the jackpot game state is a jackpot game state based on the fact that the jackpot game state became a jackpot after the end of the previous jackpot game state and before the number of variable display of the special symbol reached 390 times. The process ends at that point.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 184, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU4140a performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitor counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitor counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, a process of resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S503), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady processing, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady-state process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)). The variation pattern command transmitted by being set, transmitted by being set in the start port passing process (steps S45 and S47 of the first starting port passing process and steps S55 and S57 of the second starting port passing process). Based on the reception of the hold number designation command and the random number designation command, the control process related to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is executed.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 3013 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating a random number (for example, a look-ahead random number) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16ms steady processing is completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[8. Processing related to payout of prize balls]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, even when the payout of the prize ball is confirmed with the entry of the game ball (at the time of winning the game ball), the prize ball is immediately paid out to the player. Without this, the prize balls can be paid out in a lump sum after being reserved until the predetermined conditions are met. Hereinafter, the processing related to the payout of such prize balls will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 187, even if a game ball wins in either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, the player is immediately paid the number of prize balls according to the winning opening. The number of prize balls according to the winning opening is added to the count value of the prize ball counter without issuing. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state (the end of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot that triggered the payout of the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter when the predetermined payout condition described later is satisfied. Later), the number of fluctuation display counts of the special symbol is started using the fluctuation count counter. Then, at the end of the next big hit game state, that is, when the big hit related to the first special symbol or the big hit related to the second special symbol is reached, the big hit game state is executed, and this big hit game state is ended. Occasionally, it is determined whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter exceeds a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), and if it is determined that the count value exceeds a predetermined number of times, a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) Is established, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player. That is, after the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed after the end of the big hit game state reaches a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the next big hit is triggered by a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition). Is established, and at the end of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot, the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter exceeds the predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), if it is determined that the count value does not exceed the predetermined number of times, the predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) Is not established, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player. That is, if the next big hit occurs before the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed after the end of the big hit game state reaches the predetermined number (390 times in this example), the predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) ) Is not established, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player. If it is determined that the count value of the fluctuation count counter does not exceed the predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the count value of the fluctuation count counter is reset, that is, the count of the fluctuation display count of the special symbol is reset. However, the count value of the prize ball counter is not reset, and the count value of the prize ball counter is carried over even after the end of the jackpot game state, until the predetermined payout condition is satisfied (prize ball). Until it becomes a big hit that triggers the player to pay out the number of prize balls according to the count value of the number counter), the addition to the count value of the prize ball counter is continued.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined number of times is set to 390 times in determining whether or not the count value of the fluctuation number counter exceeds the predetermined number of times. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, whether or not the predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (whether or not the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid to the player As the boundary of (), the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot game state is set to the 390th variation. This is a value based on the fact that the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 3/11197 (1/399).

As described above, in the present embodiment, as long as the lottery result of the special symbol is not obtained after the jackpot game state is completed, either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b is awarded. The number of prize balls is continuously added to the count value of the prize ball counter. Therefore, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter increases in proportion to the number of prizes won in the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. Become. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b, it is special as long as the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers (reserved number) does not exceed four. Since the fluctuation display of the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed, the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol is substantially proportional to the number of winnings in the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b. (For example, if the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers does not exceed four at any time, the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b are won. The number of times the special symbol fluctuates is displayed increases in proportion to the number of random numbers). Therefore, after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example) after the end of the big hit game state, the count value of the prize ball counter is triggered by the next big hit. The number of prize balls is paid out to the player according to the number of prize balls, but as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next big hit increases, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter increases. The number of prize balls will be paid out. On the other hand, if the next big hit occurs before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol displayed after the end of the big hit game state reaches the predetermined number (390 times in this example), the count value of the prize ball counter is used. The number of prize balls corresponding is small, and this small number of prize balls is not paid out.

As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, only when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol since the end of the previous big hit game state exceeds the predetermined number of times (390 times in this example). , The number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player separately from the jackpot game state. For this reason, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game state falls into a malfunction that exceeds a predetermined number of times, the number of prize balls will be as many as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter. Since the number is counted and the number of prize balls to be paid out in the wake of a big hit can be expected, a player who tries to obtain the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter. The motivation of the game is increased, and the game can be continued. In addition, even if the table that has fallen into a malfunction is an empty table, a large number of prize balls are counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter, and it is a big hit. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out as an opportunity can be expected, the player's motivation to obtain the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is increased, and a new game is played on that platform. Can be made.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol since the end of the previous big hit game state does not exceed a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example). In that case, the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player, and the number of prize balls is kept until the next big hit (the count value of the prize ball counter). I try to carry it over until it becomes a big hit that triggers the player to pay out the corresponding number of prize balls. Specifically, in the low probability state, for example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a big hit at the 390th fluctuation immediately before exceeding the predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the prize ball number counter As the number of prize balls according to the count value, 3 × 390 = 1170 prize balls will be carried over to the next big hit.

On the other hand, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is set to 11/1197 (about 1/109), and as a theoretical value until the jackpot is calculated from this jackpot probability, it is special after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The number of fluctuation display of the symbol is a big hit at about 110 fluctuations. Therefore, in the high-probability state, in most cases, the next big hit will be made before the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed after the end of the big hit game state reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example). There is a high probability that the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter will not be paid out to the player. Then, when the fluctuation display number of the special symbol does not exceed the predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player. This number of prize balls is carried over until the next big hit (until the big hit that triggers the player to pay out the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter).

In a time-saving state such as a high-probability time-saving state (probability variation state), the door member 2589 is driven by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2301, so that the second starting port is used when hitting to the right. The entry of the game ball into 2587b is promoted, and there is a possibility that the big hit by the second special symbol will be selected as the next big hit. Then, if the number of prize balls for winning the game ball to the second starting port 2587b is one, the variable display number of the second special symbol is set to "1" until a big hit related to the second special symbol occurs. The number of prize balls multiplied by "" will continue to be added to the count value of the prize ball counter. Specifically, in the high probability state, when the jackpot is the 110th fluctuation as the theoretical value calculated from the jackpot probability, the number of prize balls is set according to the count value of the prize ball counter. The number of prize balls of 1, x 110 = 110 will be carried over to the next big hit.

In addition, the more the big hits (so-called Ren-chan) set to control to the high probability time saving state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit game state, the more prize balls corresponding to the second starting port 2587b during that period. Is continuously added to the count value of the prize ball counter, so that the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter increases. Therefore, when the big hits set to be controlled to the high probability time saving state (probability change state) are continuous, the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter that is added until each big hit is reached. Even if the number is small (as described above, for example, even if the number of prize balls is 110 when a big hit occurs at the 110th fluctuation as a theoretical value), the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter. As a result, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls will be enormous, and the enormous number of prize balls will be carried over to the next big hit.

As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in the low probability state, the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol since the end of the previous big hit game state is a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example). If it does not exceed, if the big hits set to control to the high probability time saving state (probability change state) are continuous, or if the good times are repeated, such as, the prize according to the count value of the prize ball counter. As for the number of balls, a huge number of prize balls will be carried over to the next big hit. For example, when the 16R jackpot game state is executed as the jackpot game state, about 2000 prize balls are paid out to the player, but after repeated good times, a special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state is achieved. If the number of fluctuations displayed in the game exceeds a predetermined number of times, a huge number of prize balls that exceed the jackpot game state will be played separately from the jackpot game state, triggered by the jackpot. May be paid out to a person. For this reason, after repeated good times, even if a bad time occurs, there is a possibility that an enormous number of prize balls is counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter. Since you can expect the huge number of prize balls to be paid out in the wake of the big hit, the motivation of the player to get the huge number of prize balls will increase and you will actively play the game. be able to.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, whether or not the predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed after the end of the big hit game state). Is calculated from the jackpot probability in the low probability state as the boundary between whether or not the number of prize balls has reached a predetermined number and whether or not the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player. It is preferable to use about 399 times, which is a theoretical value until a big hit. This makes the player feel uneasy whether the jackpot may really be a jackpot if it does not reach the jackpot even if it exceeds the theoretical value calculated from the jackpot probability until it becomes a jackpot, and hesitates to continue the game. However, since we can expect the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter) to be paid out in the wake of the big hit, such hesitation is resolved. This is because the game can be continued.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, whether or not the predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (after the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the predetermined number after the end of the big hit game state). The boundary of whether or not the number of prize balls is paid out to the player according to the count value of the prize ball counter) is the theory from the jackpot probability in the low probability state to the jackpot. It may be set differently from the value. For example, if the predetermined number of times is set to exceed the theoretical value until the jackpot is calculated from the jackpot probability, the number of times the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times increases. , Since the number of prize balls increases according to the count value of the prize ball counter in almost proportion, it is possible to increase the possibility that a huge number of prize balls will be paid out to the player in the wake of a big hit. it can. On the other hand, if the predetermined number of times is set to be less than the theoretical value until the jackpot is calculated from the jackpot probability, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the jackpot is reached (the prize ball number counter). The number of prize balls according to the count value) will decrease, but the number of variable display of special symbols will easily reach the specified number, and the number of prize balls will be paid out more frequently when it becomes a big hit, and the number of prize balls will be increased. Players will be able to obtain it easily.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, whether or not the predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (after the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the predetermined number after the end of the big hit game state). Whether or not the number of prize balls is paid to the player according to the count value of the prize ball counter) is defined in either the low probability state or the high probability state. The theoretical value from the jackpot probability in the low probability state to the jackpot calculated is used, but depending on whether it is controlled in the low probability state or the high probability state, the boundary (as the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol) The predetermined number of times) may be different. However, in the high probability state, in most cases, the number of times that the next big hit will be made before the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game state reaches the predetermined number (from the big hit probability in the high probability state). It is preferable that the number of times is significantly different from the calculated theoretical value until the jackpot is reached.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, even when the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed after the end of the big hit game state exceeds a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the change of the special symbol is performed. When a game ball wins a prize in either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, as in the case of a good condition in which the number of display times does not exceed the predetermined number of times, the prize ball corresponding to the winning opening is immediately obtained. The number of prize balls according to the winning opening is added to the count value of the prize ball counter without paying the number to the player. Therefore, if the number of fluctuations displayed on the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (390 times in this example), the number of fluctuations displayed on the special symbol will increase, and the number of prize balls will be counted in proportion to the number of prize balls. Since the number of prize balls according to the value also increases, it is possible to increase the possibility that a huge number of prize balls will be paid out to the player in the wake of a big hit.

In addition, unlike one example of the present embodiment, when the number of times of variation display of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game state exceeds a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the first starting port 2201 When a game ball wins in any of the second starting ports 2587b, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is stopped from being added to the count value of the prize ball counter, and the prize corresponding to the winning opening is stopped. The number of balls may be paid out to the player. That is, after the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed after the end of the big hit game state reaches a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the game ball is received by the first start port 2201 and the first start port sensor 3422. When the game ball is received by the second starting port 2587b and detected by the second starting port sensor 2593, a predetermined number (for example, 3) is transmitted from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. The game balls (pieces) are paid out to the upper plate 301. On the other hand, if the game ball wins a prize in either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b before the number of times the change of the special symbol is displayed reaches the predetermined number after the end of the big hit game state. Instead of immediately paying out the number of prize balls according to the winning opening to the player, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is maintained to be added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. In this way, even if the addition to the count value of the prize ball counter is stopped at the time of malfunction, at least 3 × 390 is required until the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (390 in this example). = 1170 prize balls are counted in the count value of the prize ball counter. Therefore, even if the player falls into a bad condition, the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter is added when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example). Many prize balls are counted, and you can expect the number of prize balls to be paid out in the wake of a big hit. Further, in the event of a malfunction, when a game ball wins in either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is paid out to the player to obtain a special symbol. The decrease in the number of balls held by the player has been eased compared to when the number of fluctuations displayed in the game has reached a predetermined number (390 times in this example), and the prize is paid out when the player becomes a big hit. The game can be easily continued while expecting the number of balls.

In the present embodiment, when the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers (reserved number) exceeds four and the game ball wins the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b. Also, the number of prize balls according to the winning is added to the count value of the prize ball counter, but the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers exceeds four, and special symbols ( For prizes that are not displayed in a variable manner (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), the number of prize balls according to the prize should be paid out immediately without being added to the count value of the prize ball counter. You may. In this case, in the low probability non-time saving state (normal state), the game is played in the second starting port 287b in proportion to the number of winning games in the first starting port 2201. The number of times the special symbol fluctuates is displayed increases in proportion to the number of winning balls. In addition, on the upper part of the pachinko machine 1, the number of big hits on the day or the day before, the number of fluctuations of the current special symbol after the end of the big hit game state, and the special symbol required during the big hit in the past 10 times. A data display (not shown) that can display the number of fluctuations of the game, etc. is provided, and the player can visually recognize this data display to display a special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state. How many times the next big hit has continued before the number of fluctuation display reaches the predetermined number (390 times in this example), and the number of fluctuation display of the current special symbol is determined after the end of the big hit game state. The player can grasp whether or not the number of times (390 times in this example) has been reached. Then, by grasping this information by the player, the number of prize balls (count of the prize ball counter) is triggered by a big hit to determine how many prize balls are counted in the prize ball counter. It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the number of prize balls according to the value) can be paid out, and it is possible to determine whether or not to play the subsequent game in consideration of this information. ..

Further, in an example of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b is controlled to either a time saving state or a non-time saving state as a period for adding the prize balls to the prize ball number counter. It covers the entire period, whether or not it is. For example, in the big hit game state in which the game is open for a long time, it is easy to make the game ball win in the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 that is opened. Since a large amount of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the first prize opening 2102 or the second prize 2509 are paid out in a short time, the first starting port 2201 and the second starting opening are immediately available. Even if the number of prize balls corresponding to 2587b is not paid out to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the prize balls are not paid out. Further, in the short time state, unlike the big hit game state in which the game is open for a long time, a large amount of money is not paid out in a short time, but it is very possible to win the game ball in the second starting port 2587b by making a so-called right-handed hit. Since it is easy and the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed per unit time increases, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the special symbol, and immediately the first start port 2201 and the second start port 2587b Even if the number of prize balls corresponding to the above is not paid out to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the prize balls are not paid out.

Further, in one example of the present embodiment, after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example) after the end of the previous big hit game state, the big hit game is triggered by the big hit. When the state is executed, at the end of the jackpot game state, the payout appearance is executed based on the payout appearance in-execution flag using the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the prize is awarded according to the count value of the prize ball counter. The player is notified that the number of balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, as an effect based on the big hit start command, the big hit round start command, etc., the big hit game effect during the execution of the big hit game state is paid out. Is executed separately before the payout appearance, but the jackpot game production and the payout appearance may be executed integrally. In this way, by executing the integrated production of the jackpot game production and the payout appearance, and executing the jackpot game state during the execution, for example, in the case of executing the jackpot game state that is open for a short time as the jackpot game state. , It becomes difficult to notice that the opening / closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second opening / closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is controlled to open, and unlike the big hit game state of opening for a long time, almost a prize ball is obtained. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of loss such as not being able to do so. Further, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 displays the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter. According to this, the larger the number of prize balls displayed according to the count value of the prize ball counter, the more the player has the right to obtain a large number of game balls at one time, and the player plays the game with expectation. be able to.

In an example of the present embodiment, when a prize is won in either the first start port 2201 or the second start port 2587b, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is added to the prize ball counter. However, it is the same even if the number of prizes won in each of the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b is counted and stored. In this case, when the jackpot game state is executed when the jackpot is reached after the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example) after the end of the previous jackpot game state. At the end of the jackpot game state, the number of prize balls may be calculated based on the number of prizes won in each winning opening, and the number of prize balls may be paid out to the player.

Further, in an example of the present embodiment, among the winning openings excluding the first major winning opening 2102 and the second major winning opening 2509, the winning balls corresponding to the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. Although the number is added to the prize ball number counter, the starting ports of both the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b are not targeted, but the first starting port 2201 or the first starting port 2201 or the first starting port 2201. (Ii) Only one of the starting ports 2587b may be targeted. For example, in a non-time saving state such as a low probability non-time saving state (normal state), since the game ball does not win the second starting port 2587b, only the first starting port 2201 is targeted. In a time-saving state such as a high-probability time-saving state (probability variation state), as long as the player hits the right side, only the game ball wins the second starting port 2587b. Therefore, only the second starting port 2587b is targeted. May be good. Further, among the winning openings excluding the first major winning opening 2102 and the second major winning opening 2509, not only the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, but also the general winning opening 2301 was used. The number of prize balls may also be added to the number of prize balls counter. Further, instead of targeting all the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings such as the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b, for example, one of the two winnings was accepted. Even if only the number of prize balls is added to the prize ball counter, or if only one is immediately paid out and the remaining two are added to the prize ball counter, etc. Good. In this case, even if the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b is not immediately paid out to the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player the feeling that the prize balls are not paid out.

[9. Production display]
FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining the display of symbols and the like on the main liquid crystal display device. The symbol (decorative symbol) display and the effect display on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (hereinafter, also referred to as the screen 1900) are controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140, and in particular, the decorative symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol or the second. Based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. However, it is not limited that all the contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 are controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140. For example, the main control board 4100 gives an instruction regarding a predetermined display to the peripheral control unit 4140. A predetermined display may be performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 by the peripheral control unit 4140 that has been issued and received the instruction. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol fluctuates with priority over the first special symbol. Therefore, the variation display of the decorative symbol also fluctuates corresponding to the second special symbol. Display has priority.

In FIG. 189, a central display area 1901, a hold display area 1902, and a pedestal display area 1903 are shown as areas in which the display screen by the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is roughly divided. The central display area 1901 is an area in which the decorative symbols are mainly displayed in a variable manner, and the two left and right arrows shown in the central display area 1901 in FIG. 189 show that the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are changing, respectively. Means that Details will be described later, but in this example, for example, it is assumed that the symbols showing 10 kinds of numbers from "0" to "9" are displayed in the left, middle, and right columns as individual decorative symbols. (When it is not a special time such as reach), the two decorative symbols in the left and right rows are displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative symbols in the middle row are displayed after the decorative symbols in the left and right rows are stopped. In the central display area 1901, in addition to the variable display of such a decorative pattern, an effect system such as a background or a character may be displayed. For example, the "ream" symbol shown in FIG. 193 later is a symbol having a shape similar to the decorative symbols "0" to "9", and is variablely displayed in the central display area 1901 like the decorative symbol. It is a design.

The hold display area 1902 is an area in which information about a special symbol (information about change hold) for which the start of change display is held is displayed. The state in which the start of the variable display is suspended means that the start condition is satisfied and the special random number is extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined start port, but the start condition is not satisfied and the special random number is extracted. It means that the variable display of the special symbol based on the special random number has not been started, and corresponds to the state in which the right based on the special lottery result is reserved. As described above, the hold state of the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 or the second special symbol storage display 1187, and is displayed on the hold display area 1902. Information on the fluctuation hold (specifically, for example, the number of holds (stored number) of special symbols, the reliability of each hold change, etc.) is displayed in a form corresponding to each change hold.

In FIG. 189, as an example, it is assumed that up to four hold displays 1902a to 1902d can be displayed, and each hold display is displayed left-justified. For example, in FIG. 189, each time the variable hold is accumulated, the variable hold is displayed in the order of the first hold display 1902a, the second hold display 1902b, the third hold display 1902c, and the fourth hold display 1902d. In FIG. 189, the fourth hold display 1902d is shown by a broken line, which means that there is no variable hold in the fourth hold display portion. Then, when the variable display of the first hold display 1902a is started, the first hold display 1902a moves to the left and is displayed in the pedestal display area 1903, and at the same time, the second hold display 1902b and the third hold display 1902b. The hold display 1902c and the fourth hold display 1902d are moved to the left by one to become the first hold display 1902a, the second hold display 1902b, and the third hold display 1902c.

The pedestal display area 1903 is an area in which information about the fluctuation (special symbol) currently being displayed in the fluctuation display is displayed. Specifically, when the fluctuation hold displayed in the hold display area 1902 starts to change, the fluctuation is started. The fluctuation hold moves and is displayed as a pedestal display 1903a. In the example of FIG. 189, "tilted inro" is displayed on the hold display 1902a to 1902d, and "normal position (non-tilt) inro" is displayed larger than the hold display on the pedestal display 1903a. ing. By providing a difference in the display method between the hold display and the pedestal display in this way, the player can grasp the difference at a glance, and thus the effect of enhancing the recognition in the progress of the game can be expected.

FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the hold display. Note that each display example shown in FIG. 190 is not limited to the hold display 1902a to 1902d, and may be displayed on the pedestal display 1903a. The display example shown in FIG. 190 is divided into (A) to (C) according to the type of each display. FIG. 190 (A) is an example of the effect change of the basic display pattern "inro", and "normal inro", "light emitting inro", and "flaming inro" are shown in order from the left. Has been done. The three types of display examples shown in FIG. 190 (A) are more detailed (flashy) toward the right, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation for an advantageous state including a big hit. FIG. 190 (B) can give the player a suggestion related to the character by additionally displaying the character with respect to the basic display design “inro”. Specifically, from left to right, "mystery" that makes you feel that something may happen, "opportunity" that makes you feel that it is an opportunity, and "opportunity" that makes you feel that it is a more promising opportunity. "Heat" and "ream" suggesting continuous production (details will be described later) are shown. The display example of FIG. 190 (B) is an example, and suggestions may be made by other characters. Further, the effect change of the inro shown in FIG. 190 (A) and the character addition shown in FIG. 190 (B) may be combined and displayed. In such a case, the display effects are duplicated. It can be expected to give the player an impression of being made. Further, the display example of FIG. 190 (C) may be included in such a combination. In addition to such display examples, for example, by changing the display color, display size, and the like, it is possible to realize a display that raises expectations for an advantageous state including a big hit. As a specific example of the change in the display color, it may be changed in the order of "white", "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" in ascending order of expectation.

FIG. 190 (C) shows an example in which a symbol different from the basic display symbol “inro” is displayed. Weapons such as "bow", "small sword", and "large sword" are displayed as different design examples. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 178, a super reach (“middle boss battle reach”, “last boss battle reach”) in which a production display using a weapon is performed is prepared. By displaying the weapons used in such super reach in advance instead of the inro, it is possible to suggest the development to the super reach corresponding to each weapon to the player even before the pending change starts. It is said. In this example, it is assumed that the "bow" corresponds to the "weapon", the "small sword" corresponds to the "medium weapon", and the "large sword" corresponds to the "strong weapon". In addition, in order to display the weapon corresponding to the content of the super reach that actually develops, it is necessary to pre-read the special symbol (or special random number) acquired for the reserved fluctuation at the stage where the fluctuation is suspended. However, as described above, such pre-reading is performed by, for example, the main control MPU 4100a at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the storage as the hold fluctuation is performed), and the main control MPU 4100a is based on the result of the pre-reading. The display change of the hold display (such as displaying a bow instead of an inro) may be instructed to the peripheral control board 4010 by a command or the like, and the peripheral control board 4010 may display the display on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the command. As a read-ahead-related process, the main control MPU4100a does not determine the display change of the hold display (for example, the display of the bow) and give a command to the peripheral control board 4010, but only the read-ahead result is commanded to the peripheral control board 4010. Peripheral control board 4010 that has notified and received the command may determine the display change of the hold display.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when such a display change of the hold display (or a display change of the pedestal display) occurs, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when the display change does not occur. You may do so. In addition, when a specific display is performed in the hold display (or pedestal display), it may mean that the jackpot is confirmed in the fluctuation that is the target of the display (so-called premium display). Such a premium display may be a specific combination due to the above-mentioned display change, for example, when "big sword" is displayed instead of the inro in the display color of "gold", or the characters "heat". It is conceivable that a "burning inro" with "golden" is displayed.

FIG. 191 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining a variation display example of a decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device. FIG. 191 shows that when the deviation pattern is selected based on the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) determined by the main control board 4100 by the special lottery, the selected deviation variation pattern is used. Based on this, an example of variation display when the peripheral control board 4010 performs variation display of a decorative symbol whose reach is not established is described. First, in FIG. 191 (A), the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are displayed in a variable manner, and "7" is displayed as the decorative symbol in the left column and "2" is displayed as the decorative symbol in the right column from above the screen 1900. After moving, it stops near the middle of the central display area 1901. The stop timing of the decorative symbols in the left and right rows is not particularly limited. At this time, since the decorative symbols in the left and right rows are different, the reach state is not reached, and as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the decorative symbols in the middle row are newly displayed in a variable manner and stopped (“3” symbol). As a result, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are not aligned and the fluctuations are stopped, so that the player can recognize that the fluctuations are lost. When the screen display transitions from FIG. 191 (A) to FIG. 191 (B), the size of the decorative symbols in the left and right rows may be reduced to secure a display area for the decorative symbols in the middle row. Good.

FIG. 192 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining a variation display example of a decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device. FIG. 192 shows the selected variation when the variation pattern of the jackpot or the out-of-reach variation is selected based on the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) determined by the main control board 4100 by the special lottery. An example of variation display when the peripheral control board 4010 performs variation display of a decorative pattern via reach establishment based on a pattern is described. First, in FIG. 192 (A), the same as in FIG. 191 (A) up to the point where the decorative symbols in the left and right rows stop changing, but in FIG. 192 (A), the same decorative symbols (for example, "7" symbol) are used. By stopping, a reach state is formed. When the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols in the left and right rows, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the decorative symbols in the left and right rows move in the direction of the upper corner of the screen 1900, and the establishment of reach is taught, and the screen 1900 is taught. In the central part of, the lottery effect (reach effect) determined based on the selection variation pattern table is displayed. Details of the reach effect will be omitted, but after that, in the case of a big hit, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7" symbols) as those in the left and right rows are stopped and displayed in the middle row as shown in FIG. 191 (C), and are the same. When the arrangement of the symbols is established, the player can be made to recognize that the fluctuation is a big hit. Further, in the case of out-of-reach, as shown in FIG. 191 (D), decorative symbols (for example, "8" symbols) different from those in the left and right rows are stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the same symbol arrangement is not established. It is possible to make the player recognize that the fluctuation is out of order.

[9-1. Continuous production]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as one of the effect controls related to the display of the symbol variation in the main liquid crystal display device, the jackpot is pre-read at the stage where the variation won by the jackpot is reserved, and based on the result of the pre-reading. When deciding to execute the specific effect (continuous attack) and displaying the variation of the variation (preliminary variation) that starts to change before the change of the jackpot, the precursor effect related to the specific effect (preliminary variation) There is a production control that displays a continuous attack precursor effect). The continuous attack continuous effect is executed, for example, when the main control MPU4100a selects “look-ahead generation” shown in FIG. 178 based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, a series of effect displays (continuous attack continuous effect) related to such continuous attack effect will be described in detail with specific examples. In addition, the following description will proceed based on each table and the degree of expectation of production illustrated in FIGS. 177 to 179. Further, the symbols attached to the respective figures after FIG. 193 (for example, the screen 1900, the hold display 1902a, etc.) correspond to the respective displays in FIGS. 189 to 192.

FIG. 193 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining an example of an effect display relating to a continuous attack continuous effect. In particular, FIG. 193 (A) shows the time when a special symbol that triggers the start of the continuous attack continuous effect is acquired, and FIGS. 193 (B) to (D) show an example of the effect display of the continuous attack precursor effect in chronological order. It is shown by.

First, in FIG. 193 (A), while the hold display area 1902 stores the three hold fluctuations of the hold display 1902a to 1902c and the fluctuation display is performed in the central display area 1901, the fourth hold is held. The fluctuation is additionally stored. Here, it is assumed that a special random number for which the fourth pending fluctuation is a big hit (or reach loss) is acquired and the target of the above-mentioned "look-ahead" is determined. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 178 and the like, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special random number (special symbol) acquired in the special lottery, and the lottery is further determined based on the fluctuation pattern. When "look-ahead generation" is selected in the production, the main control MPU4100a makes a look-ahead determination. In FIG. 193 (A), with respect to the hold display 1902d relating to the fluctuation subject to the look-ahead, an inro with the characters “mysterious” is displayed instead of the normal inro display. It is not always necessary to change the display mode of the hold display of the look-ahead target, but by enabling a display different from the usual one, the player can have a feeling of expectation for an advantageous state such as a big hit against the hold change. Can be done. Although such a change in the display mode may be instructed to the peripheral control MPU 4140a by the main control MPU 4100a, it may be executed by the determination process on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side in order to reduce the processing load of the main control MPU 4100a. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pre-reading process is performed, the display mode of the hold variation can be changed (hold change) as shown in the hold display 1902d of FIG. 193 (A). With regard to the pending change due to such look-ahead, the expectation for a big hit is when the pending change occurs for the pending fluctuation with a longer waiting time than for the pending fluctuation with a short waiting time until the fluctuation starts. The degree may be increased. Specifically, for example, when a hold change suggesting a look-ahead target (for example, an inro with a "mysterious" character is displayed) is performed, the hold display 1902d is held rather than the hold display 1902a. It means that the expectation of the jackpot is higher when the change is made. By doing so, the greater the time until the start of the fluctuation, the higher the expectation for the big hit, so that the effect of maintaining the high expectation for the big hit can be expected for a long time until the fluctuation starts.

FIG. 193 (B) is a display example of the next variation of FIG. 193 (A). In each of the hold displays 1902a to 1902d displayed in the hold display area 1902 in FIG. 193 (A), the hold display 1902a moves to the pedestal display 1903a and the display of the corresponding variation is started, and the hold displays 1902b, 1902c, 1902d Are moving to the left one by one. As a result, the area in which the hold display 1902d is displayed becomes a blank display until the next hold storage is performed.

In FIG. 193 (B), in response to the result of the “look-ahead” performed in FIG. 193 (A), the continuous attack precursor effect is started. Specifically, in the central display area 1901, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols that are originally displayed, a variable effect is performed in which the "ream" symbols in the left and right columns descend from above the screen 1900 (continuous attack precursor effect). ). This "continuous" symbol is a preliminary symbol that suggests that the continuous attack effect can be executed in the future, and when the reach state by the "continuous" symbol is established, the continuous attack effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous attack in the future by displaying the variable display by the "continuous" symbol as the continuous attack precursor effect.

In FIG. 193 (B), the character display mode of the hold display 1902c is changed from the character display of "mystery" in FIG. 193 (A) to the character display of "ream". , It is suggested that the continuous attack is performed in the hold, and the hold display 1903c of the character "ream" is displayed, which gives the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous attack. be able to.

FIG. 193 (C) shows a display example immediately before the "ream" symbol shown in FIG. 193 (B) stops, and thereafter, both the "ream" symbols in the left and right columns are placed in the center display area 1901. When the player stops and forms a reach state, the effect of continuous attack is started, and the display shifts to the display after "A" (the display after "A" will be described later in FIG. 194). After FIG. 193 (C), if the reach state is not formed by the "ream" symbols in the left and right rows, that is, it means that the continuous hit effect is not started in the fluctuation. As shown in 193 (D), the display is performed so that the "ream" symbol moves away from the vicinity of the center of the screen 1900.

When the reach state by the "ream" symbol is not formed as shown in FIG. 193 (D), the next fluctuation is started after the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation stops the fluctuation. At this time, the hold display 1902a shown in FIGS. 193 (B) to 193 (D) moves to the pedestal display 1903a, the display of the corresponding variation is started, and the hold displays 1902b and 1902c of the hold display area 1902 are displayed. It will move to the left one by one again, and the inro with the "ream" character will be displayed on the hold fluctuation 1902b. Then, in the central display area 1901, the variable display (continuous attack precursor effect) of the "ream" symbol as shown in FIGS. 193 (B) to (C) is performed again.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a continuous attack precursor effect is a pending variation (preliminary variation) before the pending variation (a variation in which a jackpot or reach loss is pre-read) in which the continuous attack predictive effect is executed. ) Is executed continuously. That is, when the pre-reading regarding the continuous attack effect is performed and it is determined that the continuous attack effect is executed, the example of FIG. Then, it is repeated from 0 times (when the number of pending fluctuations at the time of pre-reading is 1) to a maximum of 3 times (when the number of pending fluctuations at the time of pre-reading is 4) in a manner in which the reach state by the "continuous" symbol is not established. The term "0 times" as used herein means that when the hold fluctuation of the look-ahead target is memorized and there is no other hold change, the reach state by the "ream" symbol is not established. , It means to shift from the establishment of the reach state by the "ream" symbol to the continuous attack.

After that, when the fluctuation display of the hold fluctuation progresses and the fluctuation of the hold fluctuation of the look-ahead target starts, the display shifts to the display after “A” through the display of FIGS. 193 (B) and 193 (C). In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, despite the occurrence of the continuous attack precursor effect, the reach state by the "continuous" symbol is not finally established and the continuous attack does not develop into the effect, which is a so-called dummy. It is also possible to make a continuous attack precursor effect appear. Further, when a plurality of hold fluctuations are stored before the hold fluctuation of the read-ahead target, the main control MPU4100a or the peripheral control MPU4140a can arbitrarily determine the hold fluctuation for starting the continuous attack precursor effect. May be good. In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a degree of freedom in the execution of the dummy effect and the start timing of the precursor effect, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment gives the player a continuous attack even if the precursor effect appears. It is possible to show the progress of the game with a sense of tension and anticipation as to whether or not it can be connected to, and it has the effect of enhancing the interest.

The continuous attack continuous effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment realizes a "continuous look-ahead effect" by allowing a continuous attack precursor effect to appear before the execution of the continuous attack effect, which is a look-ahead effect. Therefore, as explained with reference to FIG. 193, the display mode of the hold fluctuation can be changed (hold change) during the continuous hit precursor effect, thereby increasing the expectation for the execution of the continuous hit effect and the jackpot. be able to. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may be capable of producing a "look-ahead effect having no continuity" in addition to such a continuous attack continuous effect. The look-ahead effect that does not have continuity is a look-ahead effect in which a predetermined effect is performed only in the fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead, and the effect related to the predetermined effect is not performed in the fluctuation before the target change. An example is a pseudo-continuous production (single-pseudo-continuous production) that does not accompany a precursory effect in advance fluctuation.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when such a single-pseudo-continuous effect can be produced, a certain hold change (temporarily hold 2) is scheduled to be a hold change due to a lost single-pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, it is assumed that the execution of the continuous attack continuous effect (pre-reading effect having continuity) is decided for another hold variation (temporarily hold 4) that is additionally stored. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4140a can replace the hold change of the hold 2 accompanying the single pseudo continuous effect by giving priority to the display control related to the continuous attack continuous effect. .. More specifically, assuming that the hold display color is scheduled to be changed when moving from hold 2 to hold 1, this change is canceled or the display color is changed to a different display color from the schedule. Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a may execute only the continuous continuous effect without executing the single pseudo continuous effect. By being able to perform such display control, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment enhances the effect of the continuous hit continuous effect, which is a continuous look-ahead effect, and also enhances the effect of the continuous strike continuous effect (here, the look-ahead effect without continuity). The loss mode is shown by the single pseudo-continuous production of loss), which suppresses the decrease in the player's interest and has the effect of sustaining the expectation for the big hit.

Further, in the display example shown in FIG. 193, the decorative symbol is not variablely displayed in the central display area 1901 when the continuous attack precursor effect appears. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such an effect display, the continuous attack precursor effect is more related to the continuous attack than the display regarding the hit or miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation in which the effect is performed (variation display of the decorative symbol). The main purpose can be to suggest continuation to the production (indication of whether or not the reach state can be established by the "ream" symbol), and the production content is inherited from the continuous attack precursor effect to the continuous attack relevant production, and a series of productions. It is possible to realize continuous production of continuous attacks. As another example, the decorative symbol may be displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol in a manner that is less conspicuous than the continuous effect of the continuous attack (precursor effect of continuous attack and the effect of the continuous attack). May be good. Specifically, for example, by displaying the variation of the decorative symbol in a narrower area than usual, such as the lower right of the screen 1900, the symbol corresponding to the variation is displayed even while the continuous attack precursor effect is being performed. It is possible to show the player that the variable display is being performed.

FIG. 194 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining an example of an effect display relating to a continuous attack continuous effect. FIG. 194 shows a display example (display after "A") after the "ream" symbols in the left and right columns are stopped and the reach state is established in FIG. 193 (C). That is, the display shown in FIG. 194 is performed in the variation display that is the target of pre-reading, and the effect display (FIGS. 193 (B) to (C)) in the variation up to FIG. It is the same effect display as the continuous attack precursor effect in which the reach state by the symbol is not established.

In FIG. 194 (A), it is shown that the "ream" symbols in the left and right columns are stopped in the central display area 1901, and the reach state is established. After that, as shown in FIG. 194 (B), by superimposing the "ream" symbols in the left and right rows into one so as to be united, the reach state is established by the "ream" symbol (that is, the continuous attack of the effect). The establishment of the start condition) may be specified more strongly. Then, the effect display peculiar to the continuous attack effect as shown in FIG. 195 is started.

In FIGS. 194 (A) and 194 (B), the pedestal display area 1903 is displayed with a pedestal in the shape of a "bow" instead of the usual pedestal in the shape of an "inro". This is an example of display change related to the hold display and the pedestal display, and the display change does not necessarily have to be performed. However, for example, when the pedestal display in the shape of a "bow" is performed as shown in FIG. 194, the super reach ("middle boss battle reach", "last boss battle") in which the "bow" is displayed using a weapon. Since it is a pattern that suggests "weapon" of "reach"), it is suggested that the above super reach of the production mode using "weapon" appears in the fluctuation displayed on the pedestal (that is, the current fluctuation). can do. By making such a display change, it is possible to make the player feel the mode of the reach effect before the actual reach effect is started, and the reach effect is highly expected to be a big hit. In the case of directing, it is possible to raise expectations for big hits, which contributes to the improvement of interest.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variation in which the pedestal is displayed in the shape of a "bow" as shown in FIG. 194 (A), the super using the "bow (weapon)" is used as described above. It is possible to have not only the development in which the reach appears, but also the development in which the expectation for the big hit is higher than the displayed content. Specifically, despite the fact that the pedestal was displayed in the shape of a "bow (weapon)", it will be possible to create a production using a "big sword (strong weapon)" in the subsequent Super Reach. By being able to perform such production control, the player can have a certain expectation for the big hit by displaying the "bow", and even change to a production with a high expectation for the big hit. You can expect it.

FIG. 195 is a diagram (No. 3) for explaining an effect display example relating to the continuous continuous effect. FIGS. 195 (A) to 195 (D) show an example of an effect display peculiar to the continuous attack in the continuous effect, and then, as shown in FIG. 196, each reach determined based on the fluctuation pattern. Shift to production (lottery production).

In the continuous attack, as shown in FIG. 195, the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the central display area 1901 within the fluctuation period of the special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the look-ahead target (within one fluctuation period due to the special symbol). An effect of varying display is performed a plurality of times with a sandwich in between (such an effect of varyingly displaying a decorative pattern multiple times is also generally referred to as a pseudo continuous effect). The "temporary stop" here means a display control that allows the player to feel the stopped state of the decorative symbol, and the method for realizing the display control is not particularly limited. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player as if the decorative symbol is stopped by performing a display in which the decorative symbol is swung in a minute range while including a stopped state within a minute time. Can be shown to.

In FIG. 195 (A), decorative symbols of the same symbol (for example, “7” symbol) are displayed in a variable manner in the left and right columns. Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (B), I felt that the "7" symbol in the left column might be temporarily stopped near the middle row, and then the "7" symbol in the right column might be stopped near the middle row. The variable display is slow enough to make it move. After that, as for the decorative symbol in the right column, the decorative symbol having the same symbol as the left column is temporarily stopped (FIG. 195 (D)), or the decorative symbol with a different symbol from the left column (for example, "8" symbol) is temporarily stopped. (Fig. 195 (C)).

In the case of FIG. 195 (C), since the same symbols are not aligned in the left and right rows, the reach state is not established, so that the reach does not develop. At this time, the temporary stop state of the symbols in the left and right columns is released, and the variation display shown in FIG. 195 (A) is performed again. Then, in FIG. 195 (B), whether or not the same symbols are aligned in the left and right columns is displayed by temporary stop, and if the same symbols are not aligned, the re-variation is repeated. As described above, the plurality of variable displays sandwiching the temporary stop of such a decorative symbol is a pseudo display effect performed within one variable display of the special symbol, and the number of repetitions is the main control MPU4100a (or). Peripheral control MPU4140a) can be arbitrarily set within a range that does not exceed the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, for example, if the number of repetitions is determined according to the degree of expectation for the big hit, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit as the number of repetitions increases.

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times in the left and right columns via FIG. 195 (C), when the decorative symbol of the same symbol is finally temporarily stopped in the left and right columns, the result becomes FIG. 195 (D). When the same symbols are aligned in, the establishment of the reach state is shown, and the display after "C" develops into the reach effect as shown in FIG. 196.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may have a pattern that does not finally shift to FIG. 195 (D) even if the continuous continuous effect shown in FIGS. 193 to 195 is displayed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 195 (C), the decorative symbols are stopped (opposite to the temporary stop) in a manner in which the same symbols are not aligned, and the fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the middle row is stopped, and then the fluctuation is displayed. However, in order to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating, it is preferable to set the frequency of occurrence of such an intermediate end effect to be low.

FIG. 196 is a diagram (No. 4) for explaining an example of an effect display relating to a continuous attack continuous effect. FIG. 196 shows a screen transition of the reach effect as an example of the effect display following the reach state by the decorative symbol established in FIG. 195 (D). In FIG. 196 (A), the start of the reach is shown together with the clarification of the reach state, and then one of the reach effects appears (FIGS. 196 (B) to (D)), and the result of the jackpot (FIG. 196 (E)). )) Or the result of reach loss (Fig. 196 (F)) is shown.

Here, the reach effect appearing in FIG. 196 is determined based on the reach effect determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) as described above with reference to FIG. 178. Reach production) corresponding to the production number given appears. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern 2 is selected (see FIG. 177) and the production number 7 is determined in the lottery production distribution table (see FIG. 178), the “last boss battle” based on the production content of “last boss + weak weapon” "Reach" will be executed, and the effect display as shown in FIG. 196 (E) will be performed via FIG. 196 (B), indicating that the jackpot is a big hit. In addition, when "look-ahead" is performed and a continuous hit continuous effect is performed, it is assumed that the reach effect that appears in the continuous hit continuous effect is selected to have a high expectation of a big hit. For example, in the example of the production expectation degree shown in FIG. 179, "medium boss battle reach of strong weapons" and "last boss battle reach of various weapons" are preferable.

In addition, in FIG. 194, an example in which the display of the pedestal is changed to "bow (weapon)" has been described, but the peripheral control MPU4140a has the reach that appears in FIG. 196 by referring to the determined production number and the like. It is possible to grasp the mode of the effect (here, the type of weapon) and display a display suggesting the corresponding weapon before the appearance of the reach effect. Further, the display change to the weapon is not limited to the pedestal display, and may be performed by the hold display shown in FIGS. 193 (A), (B), etc. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU4140a is determined. By referring to the effect number, it is possible to realize a suggestion regarding the content of the reach effect before the change of the look-ahead target is started.

As described above, in the continuous striking continuous production of the present embodiment, based on the look-ahead of the lottery result, the "continuous striking effect" appears when the fluctuation (target fluctuation) that is the target of the pre-reading changes. , "Continuous attack precursor effect" appears as a precursor effect of "Continuous attack relevant effect" when the hold fluctuation (preliminary variation) before the target variation of pre-reading changes. Continuous attack The effect is a mode in which a repetitive effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is performed to determine whether or not a reach state is established by a decorative symbol, and a predetermined reach effect appears after the reach state is formed by the effect. Is executed by. On the other hand, in the continuous attack precursor effect, the effect of whether or not the reach state is established by the "continuous" symbol is the number of executions of the continuous attack precursor effect (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol corresponding to the precursor effect, that is, the advance variation. (Number) Repeated. Then, in the early stage of the continuous attack effect, the same effect as the continuous attack precursor effect is performed, and after the formation of the reach state by the "continuous" symbol is shown, the above pseudo-continuous effect is generated to generate the continuous attack precursor effect. And the relevance to the production is strengthened.

In such a continuous hit continuous effect, when the continuous hit effect is set as a specific effect, in the continuous attack precursor effect, the precursor effect related to the effect content of the specific effect is continuously executed. Specifically, for example, this precursor effect is an effect that continuously indicates whether or not a reach state is established by the "ream" symbol (Fig. 193, etc.), and the result after the precursor effect is repeated is a continuous attack precursor. Continuous attack, not production In the production, it is shown that the reach state by the "ream" symbol is established (Fig. 194, etc.). That is, according to the continuous striking continuous effect of the present embodiment, the result of the continuous precursor effect is displayed as the variation of the specific effect (corresponding to the target variation) after the prior variation of the precursor effect. As a result, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the big hit can be maintained until after the pre-variation in which the continuous attack precursor effect is performed.

In other words, according to the continuous striking continuous effect of the present embodiment, the final result of the effect in the pre-variation (continuous attack precursor effect) is indicated by the variation after the pre-variation (target variation). Even if is displayed, it is possible to feel the possibility that the production will continue in the next fluctuation, and as long as there is a memory of the pending fluctuation, the expectation can be maintained until the previous fluctuation.

Further, according to the continuous attack continuous effect of the present embodiment, the effect in the advance fluctuation (continuous attack precursor effect) appears in a manner similar to the main effect (continuous attack relevant effect), so that a reach state is formed. It can be expected that the more the continuous attack precursor effect continues over a plurality of fluctuations, the more the impression is that the pseudo continuous effect in the continuous attack effect continues. That is, since the number of repetitions of the continuous attack precursor effect is increased when the reach state is not formed in the continuous attack precursor effect, the appearance of such a lost state rather raises the expectation for the big hit in the continuous attack precursor effect. It works.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, while it is possible to make the player expect a big hit for the fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead effect, it tends to be difficult to make the expectation for the big hit in the fluctuation before the fluctuation. However, according to the continuous striking continuous production of the present embodiment, the continuous striking precursor effect and the continuous striking continuous striking effect have a strong relationship and form a series of continuous striking continuous staging. During the period of a series of continuous continuous productions starting from the appearance stage of the premonition effects, it makes it possible to realize a sustainable look-ahead production that gives the player a sense of expectation for a big hit.

Further, according to the continuous attack continuous effect of the present embodiment, the effect of the "continuous" symbol in the continuous attack precursor effect differs depending on the number of pending fluctuations at the time of pre-reading execution and the start timing of the continuous attack precursor effect, but there are a plurality of effects. Since it can be performed continuously when the pre-variation changes, it can be repeated a plurality of times in a variation period over a plurality of times by a special symbol corresponding to the pre-variation. That is, in the continuous striking continuous production of the present embodiment, it is possible to appear a repetitive production indicating whether or not the reach can be established by the "ream" symbol in the continuous striking precursor effect over a plurality of times. Since a repetitive effect indicating whether or not the reach can be established by the symbol (for example, the “7” symbol in FIG. 195) appears, “the continuous attack precursor effect is executed in an effect mode imitating the continuous attack relevant effect”. , Continuous attack precursor effect and continuous The continuous attack continuous effect having a strong relationship is formed by the effect.

Then, according to such a continuous attack continuous production, since the continuous attack precursor effect and the continuous attack continuous effect have a common point as the continuous attack continuous effect, is the continuous attack precursor effect a part of the continuous attack predictive effect? It is possible to make the player recognize the continuous attack, and to make the continuous attack effect appear over a continuous variable period starting from the appearance period of the continuous attack precursor effect.

Further, in the look-ahead effect in the conventional gaming machine, when the execution of the look-ahead effect is suggested by the hold display or the like, the expectation for the jackpot for the look-ahead effect can be increased, while the target of the look-ahead effect is There was a problem that it was difficult to have expectations for a big hit with regard to the fluctuation digestion performed before the fluctuation. However, as described above, the continuous attack continuous effect of the present embodiment is similar to the pseudo continuous effect that appears in the continuous attack effect (corresponding to the look-ahead effect) in the continuous attack precursor effect performed before the look-ahead effect. By performing the production content (continuous production using the "ream" pattern), a strong relationship is given between the continuous fire precursor production and the continuous fire production, and a series of continuous fire continuous production is realized. There is an effect of overcoming the problem of the conventional look-ahead effect as described above and maintaining the expectation for a big hit over a plurality of fluctuations in which a series of continuous continuous effects are performed.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the execution of the look-ahead effect is suggested by the hold display or the like, the player cannot be sure that the effect with high expectation will occur until the look-ahead effect actually appears, and the player is uneasy. However, according to the continuous attack continuous production of this embodiment, the continuous attack precursor effect appears before the look-ahead effect, so that the player is given a look-ahead effect at a preliminary timing. You can be confident that the (continuous attack) will be executed, and you can enjoy the game with a sense of security and anticipation.

Further, if the target of the look-ahead effect is always specified, there is a problem that the player's interest in other than the fluctuation is diminished. However, according to the continuous attack continuous effect of the present embodiment, it is shown in FIG. 193 (A). It is also possible to control the hold display so that it does not change, and if such a control is performed and a continuous attack precursor effect occurs, the player is asked how long the continuous attack precursor effect will continue. In addition, since it is not known at what timing the look-ahead effect (the effect of the continuous attack) will occur, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit in all the variable displays in which the effect of the continuous attack precursor appears. , It has the effect of achieving a lasting feeling of expectation.

Further, according to the continuous attack continuous effect of the present embodiment, even if the reach state is not formed in the continuous attack precursor effect and the state is lost, the continuous attack precursor effect may be continuous even in the subsequent fluctuation. The effect of maintaining the player's expectation over multiple fluctuations can be expected.

Further, according to the continuous attack continuous production of the present embodiment, in the continuous continuous production, the continuous attack precursor effect is a big hit by the continuous attack, as opposed to the continuous attack effect performed based on the look-ahead. It corresponds to a production that can be expected. Then, the continuous attack precursor effect is displayed in a mode that suggests the continuation of the continuous attack, rather than indicating the hit or miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation in which the effect is performed, and the continuous attack precursor effect displayed in such a mode. By executing the continuous attack effect after the above, a series of continuous attack continuous effects can appear as a succession effect that inherits the continuous attack precursor effect. Specifically, as described in the explanation regarding FIG. 193, in the continuous attack precursor effect, the possibility of establishing the reach state by the "ream" symbol is displayed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol (or from the variable display of the decorative symbol). By emphasizing whether or not the reach state can be established by the "ream" symbol), it suggests the continuation of the continuous attack production, and the production content is inherited from the continuous attack precursor effect to the continuous attack effect. It is equivalent to realizing a series of continuous continuous production.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the effect with high expectation of big hit is continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods of the special symbol, the jackpot is hit every time the symbol is stopped in the outlier mode in each fluctuation. Since the winning is denied, there is a considerable possibility that the interest of the player will be reduced, but according to the continuous production of continuous attacks in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, a big hit in the continuous production of precursors of continuous attacks. The hit display is not emphasized (or is not displayed), and the effect display is performed in a manner in which the suggestion of continuation to the continuous attack is emphasized, thereby diluting the meaning of the win in the continuous attack precursor effect. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the player's interest due to the display of deviations due to fluctuations in the continuous attack precursor effect.

Further, in the continuous attack continuous effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the continuous attack precursor effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuations, so that each variation is not isolated and the wasteful feeling in each variation of the continuous attack precursor effect is eliminated. However, it is possible to realize a continuous and effective production for the production with high expectations (high reliability).

Furthermore, according to such a continuous attack continuous production, as long as the continuous attack precursor effect continues continuously, the expectation for the highly reliable continuous attack continuous effect can be maintained, so that the value of the continuous attack precursor effect is increased. It is possible to provide a continuous production in which the reliability increases as the continuous fire precursor production continues.

Further, in the continuous attack continuous effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the continuous attack based on the look-ahead effect is performed in each variation of the pre-variation that is reserved and stored before the change of the look-ahead target before the effect. A series of continuous striking continuous effects can be realized by being able to execute a continuous striking precursor effect having relevance and continuity with the effect. At this time, since the production time of the series of continuous fire continuous production includes the fluctuation time due to the continuous fire precursor effect, even if the fluctuation pattern of the continuous fire continuous production is a relatively short fluctuation time, the overall production time is long. Can be secured. In general, the longer the production time, the higher the player's expectation for the big hit. Therefore, by ensuring a long production time for the entire series of continuous continuous productions in this way, the fluctuation time of the look-ahead target is short. However, it can be expected that the player's expectation for the big hit will be raised and the interest will be improved. Specifically, for example, assuming that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation (right) of the look-ahead target is 60 seconds, when the normal reach effect is performed, the effect time is only 60 seconds. However, in the continuous attack continuous effect according to the present embodiment, since the continuous attack continuous effect is formed in such a manner that the continuous attack precursor effect and the continuous attack precursor effect are strongly related, for example, the fluctuation time of the continuous attack precursor effect is 15 Assuming that it is repeated three times in seconds, the production time in a series of continuous continuous productions is 105 seconds (15 × 3 + 60 = 105), and it is possible to realize a production time 1.7 times as long as the original production time. It should be noted that the fact that a relatively long production time can be secured by such a series of continuous continuous productions is expected to be particularly effective in the productions in the time-saving state where the fluctuation time is easily set shorter than the normal state (non-time-saving state). it can.

[9-2. Decisive battle continuous production]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as one of the effect displays different from the continuous attack continuous effect described in 9-1, a special display (reach state) expected to be established by a decorative pattern (reach state) is expected. A continuous production consisting of an expected production in which the so-called "tempai fanning" appears and a main production in which the establishment of a specific production mode (reach state) can be displayed after the special display similar to the expected production is repeatedly displayed. is there. In this example, such continuous production is tentatively referred to as "decisive battle continuous production" and will be described in detail below. The decisive battle continuous effect is realized, for example, by controlling the effect content to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 by the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU4140a). The peripheral control board 4010 may be executed based on the instruction by the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a).

First, as described above with reference to FIG. 176 (B), in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, specific 1 to specific 3 are prepared as the types of big hits, and the big hit lottery mode when each specific big hit is won. The period (number of times of time reduction) controlled to the time reduction state is determined differently depending on (low probability state / high probability state) (100 times of time reduction in the low probability state, 165 times of time reduction in the high probability state). Whether or not the subsequent game state is controlled to a high probability state is determined depending on whether or not a V prize is won during the big hit game corresponding to each specific big hit. More specifically, for example, when a big hit of any of specific 1 to specific 3 is won in a low probability state, it is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times after the big hit, and further, when a V prize is won in the big hit (reality). Specifically, in the case of specific 1 or specific 3 of the V long pattern), it is controlled to a high probability state. Then, the high-probability state is shifted to the low-probability state at the end of the time-saving state. As described above, the high-probability time-saving state controlled after the end of the big hit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment corresponds to the so-called "number-separated probability change state" in which the control period is limited by the number of games.

Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 169 and the like, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach determination table (not shown) used in the high-probability time-saving state (including the number-separated probability variation state) is out of alignment. By setting a relatively small number (or 0) of reach random numbers to be reached, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for a big hit when the reach state is established in a high probability time saving state. The "decisive battle continuous production" in this example is a production that mainly appears in such a number-separated probability variation state, and in this number-separation probability variation state, only the reach state is established in the production process accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol. The expectation for the big hit will be high. It should be noted that the decisive battle continuous production may appear in other gaming states (for example, low-probability time-saving state or normal gaming state), although the degree of effect expected depends on the appearance of the production.

The decisive battle continuous production is the expected production in which a special display (tempai fanning) that expects the establishment of the reach state by the decorative symbol appears, and the establishment of the reach state by the decorative symbol after the special display (tempai fanning) appears repeatedly. Includes this effect, which can be displayed. That is, the special display (tempai fanning) will appear in both the expected production and the main production, and when the special display appears, the player determines whether it is the expected production or a part of the main production. It's hard to do. Then, it is assumed that the expected effect can be executed when the effect time (corresponding to the variation time of the decorative pattern determined based on the variation time of the variation pattern) is selected, which is relatively easy to select in the highly accurate time saving state. It is assumed that the effect is easy to be selected when the expectation for a big hit is high in a high-accuracy time-shortening state, and can be executed when a relatively long effect time is selected. It should be noted that the "relatively easy-to-select production time" in which the expected production can be executed can be said to be the production time that is easy to be selected when the lottery result is out of order in the high-accuracy time-shortening state.

To give a specific example, when a holding fluctuation that becomes a big hit is stored, if a fluctuation pattern capable of displaying this effect is selected for the holding fluctuation, there is a relatively high probability (for example, 1/2 or more). The decisive battle continuous production may be executed (at a rate). At this time, it is preferable that the expected effect is continuously executed in one or more hold fluctuations stored before the hold change.

By performing such a decisive battle continuous production, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is relatively easy to select in an advantageous gaming state (for example, a number-separated probability variation state) in which the controlled period is limited by the number of games. When the time is selected, the expected effect is executed and the special display (tempai fanning) appears, and when the expectation for the big hit is high, this effect is executed and the special display is displayed multiple times. The reach effect appears after the reach state is established by the decorative pattern. As a result, in the number-separated probability change state, the chances of the special display appearing in the situation where the big hit is won (or the expectation for the big hit is high) increases, so when the decisive battle continuous production appears, the big hit It is possible to raise expectations for.

Further, according to such a decisive battle continuous production, a special display appears because the expected production is relatively easy to select in the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number-separated probability variation state) in which the control period is set to a finite number of times. Opportunities are high, but on the other hand, the special display appears even in this production, which is easy to select when the expectation for the big hit is high, so the appearance of the special display makes it possible to have expectations for the big hit. .. Then, even in a situation where the control period of the advantageous gaming state is shortened and the expectation for the jackpot tends to decrease, the expectation for the jackpot is maintained when the special display appears by the expectation effect or this effect. Can be made to.

In the following, some specific production display examples of such a decisive battle continuous production will be described.

[9-2-1. Display example of continuous decisive battle production (1st example)]
The first example of the decisive battle continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 198. Details will be described later, but in the first example, in the number-separated probability variation state, the memory of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold display 1902c in FIG. A look-ahead determination is performed by the MPU4100a, and a variation display of each variation stored before the memory of the variation (that is, a variation corresponding to the hold display 1902a, 1902b and the pedestal display 1903a in FIG. 197A) is displayed. When it is heard, the expected production is executed. It is assumed that each variation in which the expected effect is executed has not won a big hit (missing), and the effect time determined based on the variation pattern of each variation is the effect time in which the expected effect can be selected. Suppose there is. As described above, the effect time during which such an expected effect can be selected is the “relatively easy-to-select effect time” that is easily selected when the lottery result in the high-accuracy time-saving state is out of order.

FIG. 197 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining an production display example relating to the decisive battle continuous production of the first example. FIGS. 197 (A) to 197 (E) show an example of continuous production display in the expected production in the decisive battle continuous production.

First, in FIG. 197 (A), on the screen 1900 in which the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a is started, the look-ahead determination is performed for the memory of the variation corresponding to the hold display 1902c as described above. Based on the result, the hold display 1902c is displayed in a burning inro (see the example of FIG. 190 (A)). Explaining in detail the internal processing until the inro in the burning state is displayed on the hold display 1902c, the main control of the memory of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold display 1902c is based on the random number value of the special random number acquired by the special lottery. The MPU4100a decides to execute the look-ahead determination, and the result of executing the look-ahead determination of whether or not it is a big hit based on the decision is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4140a via a command, and the look-ahead attached to the command received by the peripheral control MPU4140a. Based on the result of the determination, the hold display 1902c is displayed by the inro in the burning state.

Next, in FIG. 197 (B), among the decorative symbols that were changing in FIG. 197 (A), the decorative symbols in the left column (for example, the “7” symbol) are stopped and displayed, and the fanned character display area 1904 is displayed. A predetermined character 1904a (the character 1904a is, for example, a character named "P-chan") is displayed. Here, in FIG. 197 (B), the dialogue is displayed with the characters "chance!" In addition to the drawing of the character 1904a, the character 1904a "P-chan", the dialogue display "chance!", And the stop in the left column. By the appearance of the "special display" indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols "7", the changing decorative symbol in the right column is in a specific mode (specifically, the reach state) with the decorative symbol in the left column. It realizes the production of the tempai fan that gives a feeling of expectation to form. Then, as for the decorative symbol in the right column, it is shown that the same decorative symbol (“7” symbol) as the decorative symbol stopped in the left column may stop.

That is, in FIG. 197 (B), the character 1904a is displayed while saying "chance!" With the "7" symbol stopped in the decorative symbol in the left column, so that the decorative symbol in the right column that is changing is displayed. It suggests that there is a possibility of stopping at the "7" symbol (which fuels the establishment of the tempai state (reach state) by the "7" symbol), and the stop decoration symbol in the left column, the character 1904a, and the dialogue. The "special display" formed by the display corresponds to a tempai fanning effect that expects the establishment of a specific mode (reach state).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the configuration of the above-mentioned "special display", the display in the fanned character display area 1904 (specifically, for example, the character 1904a and its dialogue) without including the stop decoration symbol in the left column is included. Although it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the formation of a specific mode (reach state) by using only the display), the expected specific mode is better when the stop decoration symbols in the left column are combined. It can be shown concretely (what can be expected to form a reach state by the "7" symbol). Further, such a "special display" is not necessarily limited to being formed by the stop decoration symbol in the left column, the character 1904a, and the dialogue display, and may be any or a combination of these. It may be formed by another character (character 1904b described later), a character display (“chance?” Described later), or the like, or may be formed by further including other drawing. Further, the display mode of the "special display" may be changed depending on the remaining number of times of the period (number of games) controlled to the advantageous gaming state.

In addition, although it is said that the decorative symbols in the left column have stopped in FIG. 197 (B), in reality, the decorative symbols are not completely stopped and displayed, and are accompanied by a fine vibration state or a rocking state. It may be temporarily stopped. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the decorative symbol is referred to as a stop including such a temporary stop state.

FIG. 197 (C) is an example of the production screen after the effect of tempai fanning appears in FIG. 197 (B), and the fluctuation is not a big hit (missing), so the reach in the right column is shown. Decorative symbols that do not form a state (eg, "8" symbol) are stopped. At this time, the dialogue display of the character 1904a changes to "chance?", Which is a relatively weaker expression than "chance!" In FIG. 197 (B). Although the current display did not form a special aspect (reach state) for such a line display "chance?", The expectation for the big hit has not been completely lost, and since then. It suggests that the "chance" may continue. Therefore, the display of FIG. 197 (C) has an effect of predicting the continuation of the chance state based on the "special display" displayed up to FIG. 197 (B).

After that, since the reach state was not formed by the decorative symbols in the left and right rows, as shown in FIG. 197 (D), the decorative symbols in the middle row also stopped fluctuating (“3” symbols in the figure), and all the rows The complete stop of the decorative pattern indicates that the variation is not a big hit. Then, one game is completed by the screen transitions from FIGS. 197 (A) to 197 (D). Since the expected effect shown in FIG. 197 is completed and displayed each time one game is completed, the expected effect is also completed at the stage of FIG. 197 (D). After that, in FIG. 197 (E), as the next variation display, the hold display 1902a moves to the pedestal display 1903a, and the variation corresponding to the display is started.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 197 (A), in the first example, the third hold display 1902c is a variation corresponding to the present effect, and three variations displayed before that (FIG. 197 (FIG. 197). In the pedestal display 1903a and the hold display 1902a, 1902b) in A), the expected effects as shown in FIGS. 197 (A) to 197 (D) are repeatedly executed.

It is assumed that the expected effect is executed in each variation corresponding to the hold display 1902a, 1902b and the pedestal display 1903a in FIG. 197 (A). The decision may be made based on the pre-reading process associated with the execution decision, or the distribution may be made based on the effect time of each variation regardless of the execution decision of the present effect.

FIG. 198 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining a production display example relating to the decisive battle continuous production of the first example. FIGS. 198 (A) to 198 (E) show an example of continuous production display until the reach production is started in the main production of the decisive battle continuous production, and FIGS. 198 (F) to 198 (H) are thereafter. An example of the effect display after the reach effect is shown.

FIG. 198 (A) shows an example of an effect display immediately after the fluctuation targeted for the present effect is started. The pedestal display 1903a of FIG. 198 (A) corresponds to the variable memory that is the target of the present effect shown in the hold display 1902c of FIG. 197 (A), and in the center display area 1901 of the screen 1900, the left and right columns are displayed. The decorative design is changing.

Next, in FIG. 198 (B), among the decorative symbols that were changing in FIG. 198 (A), the decorative symbols in the left column (for example, the “7” symbol) are stopped and displayed, and the fanned character display area 1904 is displayed. , Character 1904a and dialogue display "Chance!" Are drawn. At this time, the decorative symbol in the right column has not stopped yet, and it is shown that the same decorative symbol (“7” symbol) as the decorative symbol stopped in the left column may stop. Such an effect display of FIG. 198 (B) is the same as that of FIG. 197 (B), and the changing decorative symbol in the right column is in a specific mode (specifically, the reach state) with the decorative symbol in the left column. ) Has been realized to create a tempai fanning that gives a sense of expectation. That is, in FIG. 198 (B), as in the case of FIG. 197 (B), the "special display" is expected to establish a specific mode (reach state) by the stop decoration symbol in the left column, the character 1904a, and the dialogue display. ] Has appeared.

In this production, after the "special display" shown in FIG. 198 (B) appears, the number of times the non-establishment of the reach state is repeated, and whether or not the reach state is established thereafter are changed. Peripheral control MPU4140a can be determined based on the variation pattern (more specifically, the variation time (effect time) of the decorative symbol determined based on the variation pattern may be used). In the example of FIG. 198, the description will be continued assuming that the reach state is not established (non-established) once.

As an example of the case where the reach state is not established once after FIG. 198 (B), in FIG. 198 (C), the state in which the "8" symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol in the right column is shown, and at this time, the state in which the "8" symbol is stopped is shown. The reach state by the decorative pattern is not established. However, since the dialogue display of the character 1904a is "chance?", It is suggested that the expected state regarding the establishment (reach establishment) of the specific aspect is still continuing. Based on this suggestion, the player can expect whether the decorative pattern will re-variate and the reach state will be established, or whether the tenpai fanning effect will reoccur, etc., in view of the production process up to that point.

After FIG. 198 (C), the decorative symbol in the left column (“7” symbol) remains stopped, the decorative symbol in the right column changes again (FIG. 198 (B)), and the tempai tenpai effect appears again. .. Here, as the effect processing for executing the re-variation of the decorative symbol from FIG. 198 (C), for example, it is realized by using the pseudo continuous effect according to the control by the peripheral control MPU4140a. In the pseudo-continuous production, after the decorative symbol is put into a stopped state by "temporary stop" to form a pseudo-variable stop state, the stopped state is released and the decorative symbol (here, only the decorative symbol in the right column) is displayed. By re-variating, it is possible to realize a mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates (or stops fluctuating) in a pseudo-continuous manner over a plurality of times within one fluctuation time of the special symbol. When such a pseudo-continuous production is executed in this production, the number of pseudo fluctuations due to the decorative symbol is determined by the peripheral control MPU4140a, and the total production time required for the series of pseudo-continuous production and the subsequent reach production is determined. The fluctuation time of the special symbol in the fluctuation is not exceeded.

When the tempai fanning effect is reproduced from FIG. 198 (C), the character drawn in the fanned character display area 1904 may be changed as shown in FIG. 198 (D). In FIG. 198 (D), the characters appearing are changed from the character 1904a (“P-chan”) to the character 1904b (for example, a character with a higher expectation than “P-chan” and named “Q-chan”). has been edited. Further, in FIG. 198 (D), the characters "Gekiatsu !!" are displayed as the dialogue display of the character 1904b, and in the cases of FIGS. 198 (B) to (C) ("chance!" Or "chance?"). It is suggested that the expectation is higher than that.

After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (E), when the same decorative symbol (“7” symbol) as in the left column is stopped in the right column, the establishment of the specific mode (reach state) appears. In FIG. 198 (E), the establishment of a specific mode is also taught by the dialogue display "It's reach!". As described above, the number of repetitions of the tenpai and the success or failure of the reach state can be arbitrarily determined by the peripheral control MPU4140a based on the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation. Therefore, for example, FIGS. 198 (B) to 198. The transition from FIG. 198 (B) to FIG. 198 (E) may be performed without going through FIG. 198 (C) and FIG. 198 (D).

By performing the effect display as shown in FIGS. 198 (A) to 198 (E) in this way, a special display (tempai fan) that is expected to establish a specific mode (reach state) is displayed at least once. After that, the establishment of the specific aspect appears. Regarding the specific number of appearances of the special display in this production, for example, if the establishment of the reach state is shown without having passed the reach non-establishment even once, the number of appearances of the special display is one. If the reach state is established after the reach non-establishment is shown three times by the pseudo-continuous production, the number of appearances of the special display is four times in total.

After FIG. 198 (E), various reach effects appear (FIG. 198 (F)), and whether or not it is a big hit is shown according to the stop mode of the decorative symbol shown as a result of the reach effect. (Fig. 198 (G), (H)). It is assumed that the reach effect shown in FIG. 198 (F) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation using the lottery effect distribution table as shown in FIG. 178. Is omitted.

Further, although not shown, in the case of executing the present effect in which the reach state is not finally established in the fluctuation, FIG. 198 (B) is not followed by FIG. 198 (E). After the fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the middle row is stopped from the state of being out of reach as shown in C), the fluctuation ends.

As described above, according to the first example of the decisive battle continuous production illustrated in FIGS. 197 and 198, when a certain fluctuation is determined as the target of the main production, one or more fluctuations stored before the fluctuation are stored. Expected production can be performed in. Then, in each expected production, a special display (tempai fanning) suggesting the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) appears, and in this production, a similar special display appears, and then the specific mode is established. When is indicated, the reach effect appears. As a result, the special display appears in both the expected production and the main production, and the degree of expectation for the big hit by this production is high. Therefore, when the special display appears, the player feels the expectation for the big hit. Can be sustained.

Further, if the expected effect and the game period in which the main effect is executed are regarded as a "specific period", the special display is concentrated in the specific period in the advantageous game state (number-separated probability change state) in which the game period is limited. Since it will appear in, it has the effect of raising expectations for big hits.

[9-2-2. Display example of continuous decisive battle production (second example)]
Next, a second example of the decisive battle continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 200. In the second example, the effect display when the expected effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations is different from that in the first example. In the second example, pre-reading determination is performed for the memory of the fluctuation that is the target of the main effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect is used in the main effect, and the like is the same as in the first example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 199 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining a production display example relating to the decisive battle continuous production of the second example. 199 (A) to (F) show a continuous effect display example in the expected effect, and FIGS. 199 (A) to (C) correspond to FIGS. 197 (A) to 197 (C).

FIG. 199 (C) shows a state in which a special display indicating the tenpai fanning appears, but a decorative symbol different from that in the left column is stopped in the right column, and the reach state is not established. In the first example, when the reach state was not established in the expected effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the middle row was stopped as a normal out-of-range fluctuation, and the transition to the next fluctuation display was performed. In such a case, the effect display including the suggestion that the expected effect is continuously performed even in the next fluctuation is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 199 (D), the line display of the character 1904a says "Thank you for Q-chan!", First, a line display suggesting a change in the fanned character is performed, and then the line is displayed in response to the line. In FIG. 199 (E), the character 1904b indicating "Q-chan" appears. And the dialogue display of the character 1904b is also changed to "Ikuzo". In this way, despite the failure mode of non-establishment of reach, it is denied that the expected production ends due to the change of characters or the change of the dialogue display, and it is continued thereafter. Is suggested. The changes in the characters shown in FIGS. 199 (D) to 199 (E) do not necessarily have to be performed.

Although omitted in FIG. 199, the stop of fluctuation of the decorative symbols in the middle row may be displayed when the effect display shown in FIGS. 199 (D) and 199 (E) is being performed. Further, since the stoppage of fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the middle row in the expected effect is not important in the second example, it may be displayed small in the corner of the screen 1900 or the like.

Then, after the continuation of the expected effect is suggested in FIG. 199 (E), as shown in FIG. 199 (F), the expected effect is executed again on the screen 1900 in accordance with the next variation display of the special symbol. .. With reference to the hold display area 1902 and the pedestal display area 1903 of FIG. 199 (F), it is clear that the effect display is after one hold memory has been digested.

However, in the second example, when the next expected effect is continuously performed, at least one of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the previous expected effect (for example, the "7" symbol in the left column) remains stopped. As it is, the decorative patterns in other rows are changed. Strictly speaking, the decorative symbol in which the stopped state is maintained may transition from the completely stopped state to the temporarily stopped state. In this way, by performing the next expected production while maintaining a part of the drawing that formed the special display in the previous expected production, the relationship between the previous expected production and the next expected production is further improved. It will be strongly shown, and it can be expected that the continuity of the expected production will be strongly felt.

Further, in the second example, as shown in FIG. 199 (F), the decorative symbol (“7” symbol) in the left column is already in the stopped state at the initial stage when the next variation display is started, and the character 1904b ( Alternatively, since the character 1904a) and the dialogue display are also displayed, a "special display" that expects the establishment of the reach state will appear from the time when the variable display is started. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to make the player recognize whether the expected effect is continuously executed or the main effect is executed, and it is possible to pay attention to the future development. ..

Then, in FIG. 199 (F) and thereafter, when the expected effect is executed, it is shown whether or not the reach state is established as a result of the special display that appears, and the expected effect is continued next time. The expected effect is repeatedly performed while maintaining a part of the drawing that formed the special display (while the decorative pattern in the left column is stopped). After that, when all the fluctuations in which the expected production is performed are completed, the fluctuations targeted by the main production start (see FIG. 200). When the expected effect is repeated over a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol in this way, on the screen 1900, the fluctuation start and the fluctuation stop are performed a plurality of times while the at least one decorative symbol is maintained in the stopped state. It will be displayed. Since such a display mode is similar to the pseudo continuous effect that can be executed in the main effect, when the expected effect is continuously executed, the player is asked whether the appearing effect is the expected effect. Since it is difficult to recognize what it is, expectations for the big hit by this production are further raised.

FIG. 200 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining a production display example relating to the decisive battle continuous production of the second example. 200 (A) to 200 (F) show a continuous effect display example in the present effect, and are continuous from the expected effect of the second example shown in FIG. 199 (F).

In FIG. 200 (A), after the expected effect as shown in FIG. 199 appears, the present effect is started in the change (change corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a in which the inro in the burning state is displayed). The situation is shown. In FIG. 200 (A), as an example, a character 1904b having a higher expectation than the character 1904a is drawn, and the dialogue display of the character is set to "chance !!", so that the decorative symbol is stopped in the left column. It is suggested that the reach state may be established in (“7” symbol).

As described with reference to FIG. 199, when the expected effect is repeated over a plurality of fluctuations, the decorative symbols in the left column are displayed in a plurality of fluctuations while maintaining the stopped state (including the temporarily stopped state). However, even during the transition from the fluctuation in which the expected effect is performed to the fluctuation in which the main effect is performed (corresponding to the transition from FIG. 199 to FIG. 200), the decorative symbols in the left column on the screen 1900 remain stopped. As it is, it is assumed that the variable display is performed in such a manner that only the decorative symbol in the right column revariates. By performing the effect display in such a mode, in the same way that an effect mode similar to the pseudo-continuous effect is realized by repeating the expected effect over a plurality of fluctuations, in a series of effects leading from the expected effect to the main effect. However, a production mode similar to the pseudo-continuous production is realized. In addition, as will be explained later, since the pseudo-continuous production can be executed in the main production itself, the production display similar to the pseudo-continuous production is repeated in a plurality of fluctuations from the expected production to the main production, and the effect is special. The display will appear many times.

In FIG. 200 (B), the situation in which the same decorative symbol (“7” symbol) as in the left column is likely to stop is shown in the right column. At this time, the dialogue display of the character 1904b may be changed to a display that further raises the degree of expectation, for example, "Gekiatsu !!". In addition, as explained in the first example of the decisive battle continuous production, in this production, a pseudo-continuous production in which a decorative symbol is used to display a plurality of fluctuations during one fluctuation time (the fluctuation) by the special symbol is executed. Therefore, after FIG. 200 (B), the mode in which the reach is not established is shown once (see, for example, FIG. 198 (C)), and the decorative symbol in the left column is in the stopped state (temporary stop state) in the right column. The decorative design may be revariated (see, for example, FIGS. 198 (B) and 198 (D)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (C), when the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" symbol) is stopped in the left and right rows, the establishment of the special mode (reach state) appears. This situation corresponds to FIG. 198 (E) in the first example of the decisive battle continuous production. Then, as shown in FIGS. 200 (D) to 200 (F), various reach effects are displayed, and it is indicated whether or not the hit is a big hit according to the stop mode of the decorative symbol shown as a result of the reach effect. However, these processes correspond to FIGS. 198 (F) to 198 (H) in the first example of the decisive battle continuous production.

As described above, according to the second example of the decisive battle continuous production illustrated in FIGS. 199 and 200, when a certain fluctuation is determined as the target of the main production, one or more fluctuations stored before the fluctuation are stored. Expected production can be performed in. Then, in each expected production, a special display (tempai fanning) suggesting the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) appears, and in the expected production performed by continuous hold fluctuation, the decoration stopped and displayed in the previous expected production. While at least one of the symbols (for example, the "7" symbol in the left column) remains stopped, the decorative symbols in the other row are changed, so that the special display is repeatedly displayed in a manner similar to the pseudo-continuous production. be able to. Furthermore, when the fluctuation of the target of this production is started following the fluctuation in which the expected effect appears, the special display is displayed while at least one of the decorative symbols that were previously stopped and displayed remains stopped. It will be issued. Then, in this effect, a pseudo-continuous effect in which the special display can be repeatedly displayed is performed, and the reach effect is displayed when the reach state is established. By performing such a series of decisive battle continuous production, a special display (tempai fanning) suggesting the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) will appear in both the expected production and the main production. When the special display appears, the player's expectation for the big hit can be maintained. In particular, in the second example, it is difficult to distinguish between the expected production and the main production while making the continuity highly conscious by performing such a series of decisive battle continuous production with at least one decorative symbol maintaining the stopped mode. Therefore, the effect of sustaining the expectation for a big hit is further enhanced in a series of game periods from the time when the special display appears in the expected production to the final display of the game result by the main production. Be done.

Further, if the expected effect and the game period in which the main effect is executed are regarded as a "specific period", the fluctuation is one or more in the specific period in the advantageous game state (number-separated probability variation state) in which the game period is limited. An expected effect that allows the special display to be repeatedly displayed over a period of time, and a main effect that allows the special display to be repeatedly displayed by a pseudo-continuous effect that allows the decorative pattern to be displayed in a variable manner multiple times within one variation are executed. Therefore, the special display can be displayed intensively (also called "continuously"). In this way, the special display suggesting the establishment of the reach state appears intensively (or continuously) in a specific period, so that the player recognizes that it is a special situation and expects a big hit. Can be enhanced.

In the first and second examples of the above-mentioned decisive battle continuous production, the target variation of this production is determined first (look-ahead, etc.), and the expected production is performed for the pending fluctuation before that. It is not necessary to execute the expected effect for all of the fluctuations. For example, based on a lottery or a predetermined process, the expected effect may be executed with at least one of the pending fluctuations. Further, for example, among such pending fluctuations, the fluctuation for starting the expected production is determined based on a lottery or a predetermined process, and all the pending fluctuations from the determined fluctuation to the target fluctuation of the main production are continuously performed. The expected production may be executed.

Then, when the expected effect is executed by the pending variation (preliminary variation) before the variation based on the determination of the execution of the present effect by the variation, the peripheral control board 4104 executes the present effect. By performing a process of replacing each pre-variation effect (an effect other than the expected effect) that was determined based on each variation pattern before the decision with the expected effect, it is possible to execute the expected effect with each advance variation. ..

Further, as an example of other control processing of the decisive battle continuous production, the execution of the expected production can be determined when the fluctuation time (production time), which is relatively easy to select, is selected in the number-separated probability variation state. The expected effect is executed more frequently than the predetermined frequency (for example, the expected effect is executed 3 times or more in the last 5 games), and immediately after that, a predetermined long fluctuation time longer than the above-mentioned relatively easy-to-select fluctuation time. When is selected, this effect may be executed. In such a case, unlike the first and second examples described above, the target variation of the present effect is not determined first, and the present effect can be executed based on the selection status of the expected effect. Considering that the expectation for the jackpot is high when the long fluctuation time is selected in the number-separated probability variation state, the expectation for the jackpot is maintained by the appearance of the special display, and the special It can be expected that the expectation for the big hit will be improved by the intensive appearance of the display.

Further, in the first and second examples of the above-mentioned decisive battle continuous production, the special display (tempai fanning) that expects the establishment of the reach state by the decorative symbol is in the decorative symbol that stops in the left column and the fan character display area 1904. An example composed of display images (characters 1904a, 1904b and their lines) has been described (see FIGS. 197 to 200), but display images related to such special display can be arbitrarily combined, and the subsequent display images can be combined according to the combination. You may change the degree of expectation for the development of the decisive battle continuous production. Specifically, for example, when the character 1904b is drawn with the dialogue display "reach confirmed" in the special display, the establishment of the reach state may be confirmed. Further, for example, the expected degree of development after the establishment of the reach state may be suggested by a combination of display images related to the special display. Specifically, the character 1904a is drawn with the line display "Congratulations" in the special display. When this is done, settings may be made such that the reach state is established and the jackpot winning is confirmed. By doing so, in a situation where the special display can appear multiple times in the decisive battle continuous production, the degree of expectation for the subsequent development changes depending on the display content of the special display, so a specific display image appears in the special display. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not make the player bored, because it is possible to always enjoy the change of the production display by making the player expect it to be released.

In addition, it can be said that one of the features of the decisive battle continuous production according to this embodiment is that a special display (tempai fanning) that expects the establishment of a reach state by a decorative pattern appears in both the expected production and the main production. The more the special display appears continuously in the production or the main production, the higher the expectation that the big hit will be as a result of the decisive battle continuous production (more strictly, the expectation for the big hit in the main production). preferable.

Further, in the decisive battle continuous production according to the present embodiment, a suggestion for the continuous appearance of the special display may be made depending on the display mode of the character or the like in the special display. For example, in the expected effect or the main effect, after the special display appears and the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are in the stopped state (including the temporary stop state), the character is displayed in the character display area 1904 until a predetermined time elapses. Whether or not the expected effect or the main effect is followed and the special display appears again depends on whether or not the display remains.

Further, although the above-mentioned decisive battle continuous production is based on the combination of the expected production and the main production, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to execute the expected production and the main production in combination. .. Specifically, for example, when the execution of the main effect is decided, if there is no memory of the reserved change other than the change, only the main effect is executed without executing the expected effect. May be good. In this way, by making it possible to change the execution combination of the expected production and the main production, it is possible to realize diversity regarding the development of the production, and it is expected that the player's interest will be enhanced.

[9-3. Hold promotion production]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900) can be changed as one of the effect displays different from the above-mentioned effects in 9-1 and 9-2. Has a production. In this example, such an effect is tentatively referred to as a "hold promotion effect" and will be described in detail below. In the hold promotion effect in this example, when the "attention effect" appears based on one of the targeted hold displays and the success of the "attention effect" is shown, the hold display is displayed. The mode is changed to a display mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. This hold promotion effect is realized, for example, by controlling the effect content displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 by the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU4140a). May be executed by the peripheral control board 4010 based on the instruction by the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a).

FIG. 201 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining an effect display example relating to the hold promotion effect. FIG. 201 (A) shows a situation in which the variable display corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a is started in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900). Since each part of FIG. 200 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 189, the description thereof will be omitted, but the start of the three variable display is suspended.

If no special effect is executed, the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped in the center display area 1901 after the effect display as shown in FIG. 201 (A). However, in this example, it is assumed that the hold promotion effect is executed for the hold display 1902c, and the transitions of the effect display in this case are shown in FIGS. 201 (B) to (D) and FIGS. 202 (A) to (J). It will be described in detail with reference.

First, at a predetermined timing (for example, when a special random number of variation corresponding to the hold display 1902c is acquired), it is determined whether or not to execute the hold promotion effect. In this example, it is assumed that the main control MPU 4100a makes the determination by pre-reading the random number value of the acquired special random number. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is included in the command notified from the main control board 4100. The determination may be made by referring to the information. Then, when the main control MPU4100a determines that the hold promotion effect is to be executed, the result of the determination is attached to a command and notified to the peripheral control board 4010, and the peripheral control MPU4140a is held and promoted based on the result of the determination. The execution of the effect is started, and the display of the hold promotion effect is controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

FIG. 201 (B) is an effect display example when the execution of the hold promotion effect for the hold display 1902c is started. In FIG. 201 (B), as the start of the “attention effect” in the hold promotion effect, the reproduction of the inro (the display color is “white” which is normally used) displayed on the hold display 1902c in the hold display area 1902 is expanded. A large inro is displayed in the central display area 1901 (display of a large inro). It is emphasized that the effect on the hold display 1902c is started by displaying the large inro in this way, and then, in FIG. 201 (C), the lid of the large inro displayed in the central display area 1901 is opened. A production image is shown that makes the lid smoke.

In the pending promotion effect of this example, the "attention effect" that appears in the central display area 1901 after the display of the large inro is more conspicuous than the variable display of the decorative pattern originally displayed in the central display area 1901. One of the features is that it is shown in (a mode that gives priority to the player and can be noticed). Specifically, FIG. 201 (B) shows an example in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily hidden, and FIG. 201 (C) shows a small display area 1901a in the corner of the screen 1900. An example is shown in which the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. It is not limited to the above illustrated example that the "attention effect" in the hold promotion effect appears in a more conspicuous manner than the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed on the front side, or the variable display of the decorative pattern may be displayed semi-transparently while the attention effect is appearing. In particular, when displaying the attention effect in front of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a layer for displaying the attention effect and a layer for displaying the decorative pattern in a variable manner are prepared in advance, and each layer display is displayed. You may switch to adjust the arrangement relationship (upper and lower relationship).

In this way, by making the attention effect in the central display area 1901 appear in a more conspicuous manner than the variable display of the decorative pattern, even if the variable display of the decorative pattern progresses, the player is told that the attention effect is more important. You can feel it.

The continuation of the attention production in the hold promotion production will be explained. FIG. 201 (D) shows how the smoke displayed in FIG. 201 (C) spreads widely, and spheres are displayed one by one clockwise in the smoke. Different characters are attached to each sphere, and whether or not the attention effect is successful is indicated by whether or not a total of nine spheres with such characters are displayed.

FIG. 202 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining an effect display example relating to the hold promotion effect. 202 (A) to (E) are examples of effect display when the attention effect is successful, and FIGS. 202 (F) to (J) are examples of effect display when the attention effect fails.

First, a case where the attention production is successful will be described. In FIG. 202 (A), nine balls with the characters "Rin", "Soldier", "Fight", "Person", "Everyone", "Team", "Rip", "Present", and "Before" are displayed. As mentioned above, it shows how the attention production was successful. At this time, in FIG. 202 (B) below, a special image (specifically, an image imitating a treasure ring) showing the success of the attention production is drawn according to the arrangement of the nine spheres. This special image (treasure ring) moves toward the hold display 1902c, which is the starting point of the attention production.

Then, in FIG. 202 (C), the display mode of the hold display 1902c is changed to a display mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high. In FIG. 202 (C), the hold display 1902c is shown in a diagonal circular display mode, which indicates that, for example, the display color of the inro is red. FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the hold display color and the degree of expectation. According to FIG. 203, the red display color shows an expectation degree of “30.0%”, and it can be seen that the display mode has a high expectation degree. Considering that the display color of the inro of the hold display 1902c in FIG. 201 (B) was white (expectation degree 2.0% when referring to FIG. 203), the attention effect was successful, and the above-mentioned It can be seen that the expectation for the jackpot on hold has been greatly increased from 2.0% to 30.0%, and that the hold has been promoted to a higher rank (promotion of hold display).

It should be noted that the promotion of the hold display is not limited to the change of the hold display color as described above, and any change may be made to the display mode in which the expectation for the big hit is high. Specifically, it can be promoted to a display mode in which the expectation for a big hit is high by changing the effect of the hold display, adding characters, and the like as illustrated in FIG. 190 and as described above.

As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the attention effect is completed, and the change of the display mode for the predetermined hold display (hold display 1902c) is completed, so that the hold promotion effect of this example ends. Then, at this time, while the hold display is promoted, the variable display of the decorative pattern is originally changed from the small display area 1901a in the corner of the screen 1900 with the completion of the attention effect appearing in the central display area 1901. It is shown to be returned to the central display area 1901 of.

After that, on the screen 1900, the variation display of the decorative symbol progresses as shown in FIG. 202 (D), and finally, the decorative symbol in each column is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 202 (E), and the variation is displayed. The effect display corresponding to is finished.

Next, a case where the attention effect fails will be described. In FIG. 202 (F), six spheres with the characters "Rin", "Soldier", "Fight", "Person", "Everyone", and "Team" are displayed, and as described above, nine spheres are displayed. Since it is not displayed, it shows that the attention production has failed. At this time, in FIG. 202 (G) below, in response to the failure of the attention effect, the smoke left after the sphere disappears is drawn in the central display area 1901, and the smoke is the starting point of the attention effect. Move towards display 1902c.

Then, in FIG. 202 (H), the attention effect and the hold promotion effect end without changing the display mode of the hold display 1902c from the start of the attention effect (FIG. 201 (B)). At this time, with the completion of the attention effect appearing in the central display area 1901, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be returned from the small display area 1901a in the corner of the screen 1900 to the original central display area 1901. , It is the same as FIG. 202 (C) when the attention production is successful.

After that, on the screen 1900, the variation display of the decorative symbol progresses as shown in FIG. 202 (I), and finally, the decorative symbol in each column is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 202 (J), and the variation is displayed. The effect display corresponding to is finished.

The hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment is not particularly limited to the change of the hold display when the attention effect fails, except that the display change of the hold display 1902c does not occur as shown in FIG. 202 (H). Display processing may be performed. However, in order to ensure the effect that the hold display is promoted when the attention effect is successful, in principle, it is preferable not to raise the expectation for the big hit when the attention effect fails. Specifically, for example, when the attention effect fails, the display mode may be changed to a display mode in which the expectation for the big hit is lower than before the attention effect was generated. However, in order to give unexpectedness to the production and to prevent the player from losing interest in the hold fluctuation that was the target of the hold promotion effect, in some cases when the attention production fails. It is undeniable that the pending display is intentionally promoted (changed to a display mode with high expectations).

As described above, in the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment, the attention effect is displayed for the predetermined hold display, and when the attention effect is successful, the hold display is changed to a display mode in which the expectation for the big hit is high. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the change in the hold display. Furthermore, by making the hold promotion effect (attention effect), which is an effect display related to future changes, appear in a more conspicuous manner than the change display of the decorative pattern, which is an effect display related to the current changes, the future rather than the interest in the current changes Since it is possible to make the player interested in the fluctuation, even if the production result of the current fluctuation has a low expectation for the big hit, the production with a high expectation regarding the future fluctuation will appear. , It has the effect of raising expectations for big hits.

In the above description using FIGS. 201 to 203, an example in which the hold promotion effect is executed for the hold display 1902c that has just been put on hold has been described, but the execution timing of the hold promotion effect is particularly limited. It's not a thing. That is, the hold promotion effect can be executed at an arbitrary timing after the hold display (for example, at the start of the next change). Such execution timing may be controlled by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), or may be determined by the peripheral control board 4010 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) with reference to other holding statuses and the like. ..

Further, the hold fluctuation to be executed by the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment is preferably a hold change having a high expectation for a big hit. Specifically, for example, the result of pre-reading determination by the main control MPU4100a. , A big hit, or when a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected, it may be set so that it can be easily determined as an execution target of the hold promotion effect.

Further, as described in [4], the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts the priority variation of the second special symbol. Specifically, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The variable display cannot be executed at the same time, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 1 in the normal gaming state, right-handed hitting is not recommended (left-handed hitting or ceiling-handed hitting is recommended), so it is highly unlikely that a game ball will enter the second starting port 2587b. However, it cannot be said that there is always a possibility that the game ball enters the second starting port 2587b even in the normal game state, and in such a case, the variation display of the first special symbol is being continuously performed. In addition, the fluctuation of the second special symbol will be preferentially interrupted.

When an interrupt fluctuation is generated by the second special symbol in this way, the processing related to the hold promotion effect is controlled so that the look-ahead effect related to the variation display of the first special symbol does not become an unnatural or irrational effect due to the interrupt fluctuation. Just do it. Specifically, for example, the look-ahead by the main control MPU4100a for determining whether or not to execute the hold promotion effect (more specifically, the look-ahead of the random number value of the first special obtained random number) is performed by the second special symbol. Suspend until the interrupt fluctuation ends. Further, as another example, the variable display by the second special symbol of the interrupt may also be the target of the hold promotion effect, and the random number value of the second special random number corresponding to the second special symbol may be pre-read. It should be noted that the correspondence to such interrupt fluctuations can be applied to each effect display described in [9] and below.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the number of reserved items displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 or the second special symbol storage display 1187 exceeds a predetermined number (or when a predetermined condition is satisfied). In addition, by using a dedicated time-reducing fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol in the current fluctuation (or the next fluctuation) is shortened from the fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern selected so far. May be good. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 is 3 or more, the number of holds displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 is 2 or less. Up to, it is possible to shorten the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the out-of-order mode.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned hold promotion effect can be executed even when the fluctuation time is shortened based on the hold status in this way. For example, by shortening the appearance time of the attention effect by the shortened fluctuation time, the overall execution time of the hold promotion effect is shortened, and the hold promotion effect and the variable display of the decorative symbol are displayed within the shortened fluctuation time. To enable. As an example of processing for shortening the appearance time of the attention effect, after displaying the large inro as shown in FIG. 201 (B) at the start of the attention effect, the display of FIGS. 201 (C) and 201 (D) is skipped. By displaying the screen showing the result of the attention effect, that is, (A) or 202 (F) of FIG. 202, the appearance time of the attention effect can be shortened. If it is desired to further shorten the appearance time, the subsequent drawing of the screen (FIG. 202 (B) or FIG. 202 (G)) may be omitted. Further, as another processing example, a series of attention effects as shown in FIGS. 201 (B) to (D), FIGS. 202 (A) to (C), and FIGS. 202 (F) to (H) are displayed at high speed. It may be processed as such. In this way, while making it possible to adjust the appearance time of the attention effect, by making the result of the attention effect appearable, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shortens the fluctuation time based on the hold status. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the hold promotion effect while maintaining the natural progress of the effect. It should be noted that such adjustment of the effect time can be applied to each effect display described in [9] and below.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned hold promotion effect may be easily executed for a hold change in which the hold display is performed in a display mode different from the usual one. In the case, after attracting the player's attention with a hold display different from the usual one, the hold promotion effect is performed and the attention effect appears, which makes it possible to have a further sense of expectation. Regarding the hold display in a display mode different from the usual, each display example shown in FIG. 190 can be mentioned, but in addition to this, for example, as a display example suggesting that the hold promotion effect may be executed. The inro or the like drawn in the hold display area 1902 may be blinked.

On the other hand, the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment may be facilitated to be executed for the hold display (specifically, the inro display without colors or characters) according to the normal display mode. In such a case, when the pattern starts to change, the noticeable effect of the hold promotion effect suddenly appears starting from the inconspicuous hold display, which gives a more shocking impression and can be expected to have the effect of enhancing the interest. ..

In addition, the pending promotion effect according to the present embodiment does not deny the appearance of the expected effect regarding the variable display of the decorative pattern performed in parallel. In other words, even when the hold promotion effect for the hold change appears, the expected effect for the change may appear. However, when the hold promotion effect and the expected effect related to the change appear, the hold promotion effect is given priority to the player by assuming that the hold promotion effect is performed before the start of the expected effect. To pay attention to.

Further, in the above-mentioned hold promotion effect, the attention effect appears based on one of the targeted hold displays, and when the attention effect is successful, the display mode of the hold display is changed. In the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment, the display mode of a plurality of hold displays may be changed by the hold promotion effect once. More specifically, even if there is only one hold display that is the starting point of the attention effect, the hold promotion due to the success of the attention effect is performed not only for the one hold display but also for a plurality of hold displays. Can be. Further, the hold display that is the starting point of the attention effect may be set to a plurality of hold displays, and the hold promotion due to the success of the attention effect may be performed by the plurality of hold displays. Then, when performing hold promotion for a plurality of hold displays, the display modes may be changed to the same display mode, or the display modes may be changed to display modes in which the expectation of big hits is different for each display mode. In this way, by enabling the hold promotion effect for a plurality of hold displays, the hold promotion effect can be diversified, and the effect of further enhancing the playability can be expected.

[9-4. Period freeze production]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as one of the effect displays different from the above-mentioned effects in 9-1 to 9-3, it is taught in an advantageous gaming state controlled until a predetermined game period elapses. It is provided with an effect of advancing a plurality of games without changing (reducing) the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state. In this example, such an effect is tentatively referred to as a "period freeze effect". The period freezing effect is, for example, an effect executed in an advantageous gaming state (number-separated probability variation state) controlled only during a predetermined number of games, and is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900) over a plurality of games. It can be divided into a "lock effect" in which the display of the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state displayed is not subtracted, and an adjustment of the remaining period display performed after the end of the "lock effect". Although the lock effect is performed in the period freeze effect, the adjustment of the remaining period display does not necessarily have to be performed in the period freeze effect as described later in 9-4-2. In the following, such a period freezing effect will be described in detail. The period freeze effect is realized, for example, by controlling the effect content to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 by the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU4140a). The peripheral control board 4010 may execute the setting and adjustment based on the instruction by the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a).

FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating an effect display example relating to the period freezing effect. As described above in FIGS. 176 (B) and 9-2, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the specific 1 or the specific 3 is won, the game of the jackpot is V long open. Subsequent gaming states are controlled to a high-probability state, and this high-probability state (probability variation state) is controlled together with a specified number of time-saving states (165 times when a big hit is made in a high-probability state, and a big hit in a low-probability state). In the case of 100 times), it is maintained until the next big hit is won in the time saving state (number-separated probability change state). FIGS. 204 (A) to 204 (G) show an example of a game effect display in such a number-separated probability variation state.

First, FIG. 204 (A) shows a situation in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a detached mode on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900) when the number-separated probability variation state is controlled. Further, the remaining period display area 1905 at the lower right of the screen 1900 is a display area for teaching the player the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state, and in FIG. 204 (A), the remaining number of games of "45" is set. It is displayed. In the number-separated probability change state, the remaining period (remaining number of times) of the advantageous gaming state taught by the remaining period display area 1905 is "the remaining number of time reductions" and "the remaining period of the probability change state (high probability state)". Is synonymous with. Therefore, according to the remaining period display area 1905 of FIG. 204 (A), it is taught that the period controlled in the time saving state (and the high probability state) is left until another 45 games are played.

Next, FIG. 204 (B) shows that the hold displays 1902a to 1902c are moved to the left one by one, and the variation corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a is started. At this time, the number of times the remaining period teaching area 1905 is displayed is "44" times, which is subtracted by one time from "45" times in FIG. 204 (A).

[9-4-1. Rock production]
It is assumed that the period freezing effect is started during the fluctuation started in FIG. 204 (B). FIG. 204C is an example of an effect display immediately after the period freeze effect is executed. First, a “lock effect” is generated in which the remaining period display of the remaining period display area 1905 is hidden. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204 (C), on the screen 1900 in which the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the remaining period display of the remaining period display area 1905 is hidden by the chains that suddenly extend from each corner. After that, until the lock effect is completed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while the remaining period display is hidden. In FIG. 204 (C), it is preferable that the chain image is drawn in front of the other images on the screen 1900 to emphasize the importance of the period freezing effect.

FIG. 204 (D) shows a situation in which the decorative symbol has stopped fluctuating in a detached manner while the state of FIG. 204 (C) in which the remaining period display is hidden by the lock effect. Here, in the normal effect display when the period freeze effect is not executed, the remaining period display area 1905 is displayed as described in the screen transition from FIG. 204 (A) to FIG. 204 (B). The number of times is subtracted by one, and the next variation display is about to start. In FIG. 204 (D), the next variation display by the decorative symbol is started while the remaining period display is hidden by the lock effect. (For example, FIG. 204 (C)). In FIG. 204 (D), the character "sealed" is displayed on the front surface of the chain image of the remaining period display area 1905, but the change (subtraction) of the remaining period teaching in the advantageous gaming state is stopped. This is an example of a display suggesting that.

After the next fluctuation starts with the remaining period display hidden (the subtraction display is stopped) in this way, the fluctuation display is again the same as shown in FIGS. 204 (C) to 204 (D). Will be done. In the period freezing effect according to the present embodiment, the lock effect appears over a plurality of game periods in which the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol or special symbol) is performed a plurality of times. The game period in which the lock effect appears is determined by the main control board 4100 or the peripheral control board 4010. Then, when the plurality of game periods in which the lock effect appears have elapsed, the lock effect ends, and the process proceeds to FIG. 204 (E) or FIG. 204 (F).

In the example of FIG. 204, when FIGS. 204 (C) to 204 (D) are repeatedly displayed, the number of hold displays displayed in the hold display area 1902 is not changed. This is because a pseudo-continuous production is performed as an example for realizing the appearance of the lock production over a plurality of game periods. In this pseudo-continuous effect, after the decorative symbol is put into a stopped state by "temporary stop" to form a pseudo-variable stop state, the stopped state is released and the decorative symbol is re-variated to cause a special symbol. Within one fluctuation time, a mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates (or stops fluctuating) in a pseudo-continuous manner over a plurality of times is made to appear. Then, by displaying a pseudo-continuous effect while hiding the remaining period display in the period freeze effect, a period freeze effect is realized in which the remaining period in the time saving state (and high probability state) does not decrease over a plurality of variable displays. can do. However, since the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol is varied and displayed multiple times during one variable display by the special symbol, when the pseudo-continuous effect is used during the lock effect of the period freeze effect, it is in an advantageous gaming state. Only one value of the internal counter (time reduction counter) regarding the controlled number of games is consumed (subtracted).

Further, the method of realizing the appearance of the lock effect over a plurality of game periods in the period freeze effect is not limited to the pseudo continuous effect as described above. Alternatively, for example, the lock effect may be continuously displayed while the variable display of the special symbol is performed a plurality of times, in other words, while the variable display based on the special random number is performed a plurality of times. However, in such a case, since a plurality of internal time reduction counters related to the advantageous gaming state are consumed (subtracted) during the lock effect, the remaining period in the processing after the end of the lock effect, which will be described later. The display may need to be adjusted.

In any case, in the period freeze effect, the lock effect as described above occurs over a plurality of game periods, so that the remaining period (remaining number of times) of the advantageous gaming state is reduced in the plurality of game periods. It can be shown to the player as if the game is progressing. In the first place, since the number-separated probability change is an advantageous game state in which the control period is finite, the period of the remaining advantageous game state becomes shorter as the game progresses without winning the jackpot, and the expectation for the next jackpot diminishes. There is a considerable problem that the interest is reduced, but according to the period freeze effect according to the present embodiment, not only can the player feel a sense of security and suppress such a decrease in interest, but it is also advantageous for the player. Since it is possible to give the impression that the game is progressing, it is possible to raise expectations for big hits and improve the interest.

Further, in the period freezing effect according to the present embodiment, the display content may be fixed and shown instead of hiding the remaining period display of the remaining period display area 1905 during the lock effect. Specifically, the game is advanced a plurality of times during the lock effect without changing the display of the remaining number of times of "44" displayed in FIG. 204 (B). Even in such a case, since it is possible to show that the game is progressing a plurality of times without reducing the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state, the same effect as in the case of hiding the remaining period display can be obtained.

[9-4-2. Adjustment of remaining period display]
FIG. 204 (E) is an example of an effect display in which the same decorative symbols are aligned and a big hit is shown after the lapse of the lock effect over a plurality of game periods. Actually, the establishment of the reach state and the reach effect associated with the establishment appear between FIGS. 204 (D) and 204 (E), but are the same as those described in the other effect display examples. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 204 (E), the jackpot is shown while the display of the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state is stopped by the lock effect of the expected freezing effect, so that in the plurality of game periods of FIGS. 204 (C) to 204 (D). , It is displayed as if the game period in the advantageous game state has reached the jackpot without being digested. Generally, after winning the jackpot, whether or not the advantageous gaming state is controlled again after the jackpot game, the control period of the advantageous gaming state, etc. are determined again based on the jackpot, and therefore, in FIG. 204 (E). , The remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state after the stop state due to the lock effect is released is not displayed in the remaining period display area 1905.

On the other hand, FIG. 204 (F) shows an example of an effect display when the decorative symbol is completely stopped in a detached manner after the lock effect spanning a plurality of game periods as shown in FIGS. 204 (C) to 204 (D). Is. In FIG. 204 (F), the chain image hiding the remaining period display area 1905 is gradually disappeared as a display indicating the end of the lock effect. After that, when the chain image completely disappears as shown in FIG. 204 (G), the remaining period display of the remaining period display area 1905 is exposed, and the display content of the remaining period display is adjusted as necessary. .. In FIG. 204 (G), if the game period spanning a plurality of times in which the lock effect appears is due to a series of pseudo-continuous effects, the number of games in a substantially advantageous gaming state (number of fluctuations due to a special symbol). Since) is consumed only once, the remaining period display of the remaining period display area 1905 remains at the remaining “44” times, as at the start of the lock effect shown in FIG. 204 (B).

In the following, the adjustment of the remaining period display after the end of the lock effect will be described in detail. The adjustment of the remaining period display is performed differently based on what kind of game the multiple games during the lock effect are, and how the remaining period of the advantageous game state is set. ..

(1) First Example First, as a first example, as illustrated and described in FIG. 204, there is a form in which a pseudo continuous effect is performed during a lock effect. In this case, as described above, although the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed a plurality of times during the lock effect, the variable display of the special symbol is performed only once, so that the remaining period display after the lock effect is completed is adjusted. Is unnecessary.

In addition, in FIGS. 204 (C) to 204 (D), since the hold display is performed on the rear side of the chain image during the lock effect, the player indicates that the pseudo continuous effect is based on the display transition of the hold display. Although it was possible to guess, in order to make such a guess difficult, the hold display, the pedestal display, and the like may be hidden or the display mode may be difficult to identify during the lock effect. By doing this, it seems that the game is progressing multiple times during the lock production, so the player has a sense of expectation for a big hit, a sense of security by stopping subtraction for the remaining period, and a sense of profit. You can expect it to feel like a minute.

(2) Second Example Next, as a second example, there is a mode in which variable display by a special symbol is performed a plurality of times during a lock effect. In such a case, as described above, the value of the internal advantageous gaming state counter (time reduction counter) is subtracted each time the fluctuation display by the special symbol is performed, but the remaining period display area 1905 is used. By hiding (or fixing) the remaining period displayed, it appears that the finite period of the advantageous gaming state is not consumed during the lock effect. However, after the lock effect is completed, the remaining period display is adjusted so as to match the value of the counter in the internal advantageous gaming state. It should be noted that such adjustment of the remaining period display may not be performed immediately after the end of the lock effect, and may be performed after a certain period of time has elapsed or at a predetermined timing when the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state is reduced.

If a large amount of remaining period is reduced and displayed at one time after the end of the lock effect, the player's interest may be reduced. Therefore, as another method, the remaining period after the end of the lock effect is not adjusted, and then the remaining period is not adjusted. At a predetermined timing near the end of the advantageous gaming state (for example, when the remaining period reaches 20 times), the display mode of the remaining period display area 1905 is changed from the previous number of times display to the "?" Mark. Etc. Then, by changing the display mode to the "?" Mark, it is possible to absorb and adjust the number of times consumed during the lock effect by making the remaining number of times of the strict advantageous gaming state taught to the player unclear. , The advantageous gaming state may be terminated when the time reduction counter reaches "0". In such a case, when the period freeze effect (mainly the lock effect) appears, the player can enjoy the advantageous game in which the subtraction of the remaining period of the advantageous game state is stopped, and the advantageous game. When the remaining period of the state is short, the player can enjoy the game with a feeling of excitement that he / she does not know when the advantageous game state will end.

(3) Third Example Next, as a third example, there is a form in which the internal remaining period of the advantageous gaming state and the remaining period taught in the remaining period display area 1905 are displayed differently in the number-separated probability variation state. is there. Specifically, for example, when the number of games in the internal advantageous game state (corresponding to the set value of the time reduction counter) is set to "100" at the start of the number-separated probability change state, the remaining period display area 1905 Set the remaining period display to "80" times. At this time, the difference of 20 times is the number of games in the hidden advantageous game state (the number of times set in the back), so when the period freeze effect is performed in the subsequent advantageous game state, the lock effect of the period freeze effect is performed. The number of games consumed during can be offset by the number of back-set times.

Such a method of the third example can be applied to any of the pseudo continuous effect shown in the first example and the effect over a plurality of variations shown in the second example, and remains in the middle of the advantageous gaming state. Since it is not necessary to adjust the period, it also contributes to reducing the processing load.

Further, in the third example, the number of games played in the peripheral control MPU4140a (may be the main control MPU4100a) in the internal advantageous gaming state (set value of the time reduction counter) is compared with the remaining period display of the remaining period display area 1905. Therefore, when a difference of a predetermined number of times or more can be confirmed, control may be performed so as to facilitate execution of the period freezing effect. In such a case, the digestion of the difference between the actual remaining number of times inside and the remaining number of times on the surface is promoted, and the game progress in the overall advantageous gaming state can be performed with a natural impression. Not only that, since the possibility that the period freeze effect is executed toward the end of the advantageous gaming state increases, the player's interest can be improved as the remaining period becomes shorter.

Then, in the form of the third example, for example, if 80 games have passed without winning the next big hit, the remaining period displayed in the remaining period display area 1905 will be 0 times, but by then Depending on the history of execution of the period freeze effect, the value of the time reduction counter may not be 0 (1 or more remains). In such a case, by displaying the game period until the time reduction counter becomes 0 as an extension period, an additional privilege (extension period of the advantageous gaming state) can be given to the player. It is possible to provide a variety of playability.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the period freezing effect can be executed in a specific advantageous gaming state (in the example, the number-separated probability variation state) in which the control period is finitely defined. A lock effect in which the remaining period of the advantageous game state taught to the player is not subtracted appears over a plurality of game periods, and the remaining period on the display of the advantageous game state that may occur with the lock effect. By matching the difference between and the internal remaining period, it gives a sense of security that dispels the anxiety that the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state will decrease, and realizes the effect of enhancing the game interest.

Regarding the execution trigger of the period freeze effect, the peripheral control board 4010 may be executed based on the instruction by the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a), but in order to enhance the above-mentioned effect. Controls that when it is determined that the random number value of the special random number acquired when the game ball passes through the start port has a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the period freeze effect is performed by the fluctuation based on the random number value. It is preferable to be done. Judgment as to whether or not the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high can be executed by the main control board 4100. Can be determined and an instruction for effect control can be sent to the peripheral control board 4010.

In addition, when performing a pseudo-continuous effect during the lock effect of the period freeze effect, a relatively long fluctuation time is required. Therefore, when a relatively long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the period The execution of the freezing effect may be selected.

[10. Effect of this embodiment]
As described in [9-2], the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a special display (so-called tempai fanning) that is expected to establish a specific effect mode (reach state) with a decorative pattern. A decisive battle continuous production can be executed, which consists of an expected production and a main production in which the establishment of a specific production mode (reach state) can be displayed after the special display similar to the expected production is repeatedly displayed. Such a decisive battle continuous effect is, for example, an effect executed in an advantageous game state in which the control period is limited by a finite number of games (for example, a number-separated probability variation state). When the state (specific mode) is established, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high.

Then, in the decisive battle continuous production, first, a special display (tempai fanning) that expects the establishment of the above specific mode is displayed by the expected production, and further, after the special display is repeatedly displayed by this production, the specific mode is displayed. The establishment may be displayed. In addition, the expected effect may be repeatedly executed over a plurality of variable display games before the execution of the main effect. Further, the expected effect is easily executed when the effect time (corresponding to the variation time of the decorative pattern determined based on the variation time of the variation pattern) is selected, which is relatively easy to be selected in the highly accurate time saving state, and this effect is achieved. Is likely to be executed when the expectation for a big hit is high in a high-accuracy time-shortening state (when a relatively long production time is selected). It should be noted that the "relatively easy-to-select production time" in which the expected production can be executed can be said to be the production time that is easy to be selected when the lottery result is out of order in the high-accuracy time-shortening state.

By performing such a decisive battle continuous production, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the production time that is relatively easy to select in the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number-separated probability variation state) in which the control period is set to a finite number of times. When selected, the expected effect is executed and a special display (tempai fanning) appears, and when the expectation for a big hit is high, this effect is executed and the special display is displayed multiple times, and then the decorative pattern is displayed. After the establishment of the reach state by, the reach production appears. As a result, in the number-separated probability change state, the chances of the special display appearing in the situation where the big hit is won (or the expectation for the big hit is high) increases, so when the decisive battle continuous production appears, the big hit It is possible to raise expectations for.

For example, according to the first example of the decisive battle continuous production illustrated in FIGS. 197 and 198, when a certain fluctuation is determined as the target of the main production, one or more fluctuations stored before the fluctuation are expected. The production can be performed. Then, in each expected production, a special display (tempai fanning) suggesting the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) appears, and in this production, a similar special display appears, and then the specific mode is established. When is indicated, the reach effect appears. As a result, a special display appears in both the expected effect and the main effect, and if the game period in which the expected effect and the main effect are executed is regarded as a "specific period", an advantageous gaming state in which the game period is limited (number of times divided). Since the special display will be displayed intensively in a specific period in the probabilistic state), it has the effect of increasing the expectation for the big hit.

Further, for example, according to the second example of the decisive battle continuous production illustrated in FIGS. 199 and 200, when a certain fluctuation is determined as the target of the main production, in one or more fluctuations stored before the fluctuation. Expected production can be performed. Then, in each expected production, a special display (tempai fanning) suggesting the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) appears, and in the expected production performed by continuous hold fluctuation, the decoration stopped and displayed in the previous expected production. While at least one of the symbols (for example, the "7" symbol in the left column) remains stopped, the decorative symbols in the other row are changed, so that the special display is repeatedly displayed in a manner similar to the pseudo-continuous production. be able to. Furthermore, when the fluctuation of the target of this production is started following the fluctuation in which the expected effect appears, the special display is displayed while at least one of the decorative symbols that were previously stopped and displayed remains stopped. It will be issued. Then, in this effect, a pseudo-continuous effect in which the special display can be repeatedly displayed is performed, and the reach effect is displayed when the reach state is established. By performing such a series of decisive battle continuous production, a special display (tempai fanning) suggesting the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) will appear in both the expected production and the main production. If the expected effect and the game period in which the main effect is executed are regarded as a "specific period", a special display is displayed over one or more fluctuations in a specific period in an advantageous game state (number-separated probability variation state) in which the game period is limited. Since the expected effect that can be repeatedly displayed and the main effect that can repeatedly appear the special display by the pseudo-continuous effect that can change and display the decorative pattern multiple times within one variation are executed, the special display is displayed. It can appear intensively (also called "continuously"). In this way, the special display suggesting the establishment of the reach state appears intensively (or continuously) in a specific period, so that the player recognizes that it is a special situation and expects a big hit. Can be enhanced.

The effect of the continuous production of the decisive battle in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the above, but other characteristic effects are mainly as described in [9-2].

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment described as the game machine according to the present invention is a game ball to a predetermined area (first start port 2201, second start port 2587b) provided in the game area (game area 1100). This is an example of a gaming machine in which a lottery for a big hit is performed based on the passage of the game, and when a big hit is selected in the lottery, a big hit game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game is executed. Further, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU4100a) is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined game period elapses after the execution of the big hit game by the big hit when a specific big hit is selected by lottery. This is an example of an advantageous game state control means for controlling a state (for example, corresponding to a number-separated probability change state). Further, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of an effect display device for displaying an effect for showing the result of a lottery. Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU4140a) is an example of the symbol display control means for controlling the variation display using a plurality of types of symbols performed by the effect display device based on the result of the lottery. Further, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a) and the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) are specially expected to establish a specific effect mode when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the symbol display control means. This is an example of the expected effect executing means for executing the expected effect in which the display appears, and when the symbol display control means repeatedly displays the symbol, the establishment of a specific effect mode is displayed after the special display is repeatedly displayed. It is an example of the present effect executing means for executing the present effect that can be performed, and is special for the specific period by executing the expected effect by the expected effect executing means and the main effect by the present effect executing means in a specific period in the advantageous gaming state. This is an example of a centralized appearance means for intensively displaying the display. Specifically, the special display that expects the establishment of a specific production mode corresponds to the special display (tempai fanning) that expects the establishment of the reach state, and the expected production executed by the expected production execution means is a continuous decisive battle. It corresponds to the expected production in the production. In addition, the main production executed by the main production execution means corresponds to the main production in the decisive battle continuous production. Then, the processing by the centralized appearance means corresponds to the processing of a series of production display examples in the decisive battle continuous production described in [9-2-1] and [9-2-2].

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1110A Front component 1150 Game panel 1158 Opening 1900 Main liquid crystal display device, screen 1901 Center display area 1902 Hold display area 1903 Pedestal display area 1904 Fan character Display area 1905 Remaining period Display area 2000 Table unit 2100 Attacker unit 2101 General winning opening 2102 First big winning opening 2200 Starting port unit 2201 First starting port 2201b First starting port 2300 Table side unit 2301 General winning opening 2500 Center accessory 2502 Peripheral wall 2509 2nd prize entrance (entrance)
2509a Attacker passage (distribution passage)
2509b Specific area 2510 Center base 2510k Branch passage 2510l Branch space 2510m Communication passage 2510n Second attacker space 2510p Guidance unit 2570 Second attacker unit 2571 Unit base 2571e Receiving part 2571f Guidance part 2571i Lower right protrusion 2571j Stopper part 2572 Second opening / closing member (Opening and closing member)
257a Blade part 257b Shaft part 2578 Second count sensor 2578a Specific count sensor 2578b Movable piece 2580 Second start port unit 2585a Gate part 2587b Second start port

Claims (1)

A lottery means for acquiring start information by passing a game ball to a predetermined area provided in the game area and performing a lottery regarding a big hit when the start condition of the acquired start information is satisfied.
A special figure effect means for performing a variation effect on a display device according to a variation display of a special symbol indicating a big hit based on the lottery result by the lottery means.
A hold storage means for holding the start information acquired in response to passing through the predetermined area, and
A start storage display means capable of displaying the start information held in the hold storage means on a display device as a start storage display, and
A pre-determination means that predetermines the acquired start information before the start condition is satisfied, and
In the variable effect that the start condition of the acquired start information is satisfied and executed, the specific effect means for executing the specific effect that holds the expectation for the big hit, and the specific effect means.
In the variation effect performed based on the start information acquired before the start information in which the specific effect is executed in the variation effect performed by the establishment of the start condition, the specific effect is performed later. A precursor effect means for executing a precursor effect suggesting that the variable effect is executed, and a precursor effect means for executing the precursor effect.
With
The precursor effect executed by the precursor effect means is an effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed in the variable effect performed later, and suggests that the specific effect is executed. When the mode of the effect becomes a specific mode, it is configured to notify that the specific effect is executed in the variable effect to be performed later.
The start storage display means is used so that the player can recognize which of the start information held in the hold storage means is the start information on which the specific effect may be executed. The display mode of the start memory display can be displayed in a change suggestion mode different from the normal display mode.
By making the pre-determination performed before the start condition is satisfied by the pre-determination means and the lottery performed when the start condition of the start information is satisfied by the lottery means, the specific effect is achieved. Is the start information to be executed, it can be determined by the preliminary determination by the advance determination means before the start condition of the start information is satisfied.
In the case in which aspects of the aura effect by executing the aura effect is did not become the specific embodiments, executing the aura effect again, the specific effect by the specific embodiments aspects of the aura effect to be executed again Can be notified that is executed ,
The specific effect performed after the mode of the precursor effect becomes the specific aspect is executed in a form in which the specific aspect of the precursor effect is inherited.
Based on the fact that the start condition of the start information displayed as the start memory display is satisfied by the start memory display means, the start memory display displayed of the start information for which the start condition is satisfied is terminated. , The start information for which the start condition is satisfied is newly displayed on the display device as a changing display.
The display mode of the start memory display is displayed when the specific effect is executed in the variation effect started when the start condition of the start information is satisfied, which is displayed in the change suggestion mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display can be displayed in a mode different from the change suggestion mode displayed as the start memory display before the start condition is satisfied.

Images